Canon iR5000i Service Manual Download

Page: 743 / 878

2000 2000 2000 2000

CANON iR5000i/iR6000i REV.0 JUNE 2001

CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE

5-10 T

<ACC-STS>

Indicates the connection of accessories.

FEEDER

Indicates the connection of the ADF. (0: not connected, 1: connected)

SORTER

Indicates the state (connection) of the finisher and the puncher unit.

Display: xy
x= 0: none, 1: finisher, 2: saddle finisher, 3: shift tray
y= 0: none, 1: 2-hole, 2: 2/3-hole, 3: 4-hole (FRN), 4: 4-hole (SWDN)

DECK

Indicates the connection of the paper deck (accessory). (0: not connected,
1: connected)

CARD

Indicates the connection of the control card. (0: not connected, 1: con-
nected)

DATA-CON

Indicates the connection of a self diagnosis device. (0: none, 1: copy data
controller, 2: remote diagnostic device)

RAM

Indicates the size of the memory mounted to the main controller. (64 MB,
128 MB)

NIB

Indicates the connection of a network board. (0: none, 1: Etherboard, 2: To-
ken-Ring, 3: both)

LIPS-RAM

Indicates the size of the memory mounted on the LIPS board. (xx MB)

LIPS

Indicates the connection of the LIPS board. (0: not connected, 1: con-
nected)

PS/PCL

indicates PS/PCL settings (0: absent; 1: PS/PCL; 2: PS kanji)

RIP1

Indicates the connection of the RIP1 board. (0: not connected, 1: con-
nected)

NETWARE

indicates presence of NetWare firmware (0: absent; 1: present)

COPIER>DISPLAY

Summary of Contents for iR5000i

Page 2: ...s of this manual over a long or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies Copyright This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved Under the co...

Page 3: ...m prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question Memo Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in ques tion REF Provides a description of a service mode Provides a descripti...

Page 4: ...onditions and installation procedure relocation of the machine installation of ac cessories 2 Reader Unit Chapter 1 Basic Operation functional construction outline of electrical circuitry basic sequence of operations Chapter 2 Original Exposure System principles of operation of the exposure sys tem timing of operation disassembly assem bly and adjustment Chapter 3 Image Processing System principle...

Page 5: ...le of consumables durables scheduled servicing chart Chapter 2 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure basic procedure for image adjustment Chapter 3 Standards and Adjustments standards and adjustments Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Image Faults Malfunctions troubleshooting image faults malfunctions Chapter 5 Service Mode how to use service mode list of service modes Chapter 6 Self Diagnosis codes causes of e...

Page 6: ...level of a given signal is High while 0 is used to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically all cases the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field Therefore the operations of the microprocessors used in the ma chines are not discussed they are...

Page 7: ...CTION v System Configuration The iR5000i iR6000i may be configured with the following accessories for a fully inte grated system 1 2 7 4 3 5 6 1 Finisher F1 Saddle Finisher F2 2 Copy Tray C1 3 Shift Tray B1 4 DADF D1 standard 5 Paper Deck G1 6 Puncher Unit B1 C1 D1 7 Image Reader A1 Figure 1 ...

Page 8: ...of data being processed Check to make sure that the Execution Memory lamp on the control panel is off before operating the main power switch 2 Do not turn off the main power switch while downloading is taking place Otherwise the machine may become disabled 3 The cassette heater and the drum heater remain powered as long as the environment switch and the heater switch are on even when the main powe...

Page 10: ...ual ity 1 1S 1 1 2 Hard Disk 1 1S 1 1 3 Stackless Duplexing Mecha nism 1 1S 1 1 4 Large Capacity Paper Source 1 1S 1 1 5 Variety of Delivery Processing with accessories 1 1S 1 1 6 Printer Type 1 1S 1 1 7 Addition of the Differential PCB 1 1S 2 Specifications 1 2S 2 1 Copier 1 2S 2 1 1 Type 1 2S 2 1 2 Method 1 2S 2 1 3 Functions 1 3S 2 1 4 Others 1 8S 2 2 Paper Deck G1 1 11S 2 3 Shift Tray B1 1 12S...

Page 11: ...Flow of Print Jobs 2 17S 3 3 2 TCP IP 2 18S 3 3 3 NetWare 2 19S 3 3 4 AppleTalk 2 20S 3 3 5 Processing Print Data 2 21S 4 Soft Counter 2 22S 5 Controlling the Power Supply 2 24S 5 1 Outline 2 24S 5 2 Power Supply Mode 2 24S 5 3 Standby Mode normal operation 2 24S 5 4 Power Save Mode 2 24S 5 5 Low Power Mode 2 25S 5 5 1 Shift from Standby Mode standby low power 2 25S 5 5 2 Shift to Standby Mode low...

Page 12: ...late left deck 3 19S 2 10 Supplying Toner 3 20S 2 11 Setting the Cassette 3 21S 2 12 Changing the Paper Size for the Front Deck right left 3 22S CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2 13 Installing the DADF D1 3 22S 2 14 Checking Images Operations and User Mode 3 23S 2 15 Checking the Environment Switch 3 25S 2 16 Installing the Machine 3 26S 2 17 Connecting to the Network 3 26S 2 18 Checking the Connection to ...

Page 14: ...t 1 1 4 Large Capacity Paper Source The addition of an accessory will enable accommodation of as many as 7650 sheets of pa per 80 g m2 Right front paper deck 1500 sheets Left front paper deck 1500 sheets Cassette 3 550 sheets if 64 g m2 600 sheets Cassette 4 550 sheets if 64 g m2 600 sheets Multifeeder 50 sheets Paper Deck G1 accessory 3500 sheets 1 1 5 Variety of Delivery Processing with accessor...

Page 15: ...ody Copyboard Light source Lens Photosensitive medium Item Reproduction Charging Exposure Copy density adjustment Development Pickup Transfer Separation Cleaning Fixing Auto Manual Specifications Indirect statophotography Corona Laser Auto or manual Dry 1 component toner production Front paper deck 2 holders Front cassette 2 holders Manual feed tray 5 5 mm deep about 50 sheets of 80 m2 paper Coron...

Page 16: ... Reduce II 1 0 500 Reduce III 1 0 611 Reduce IV 1 0 707 Reduce V 1 0 816 Reduce IV 1 0 865 Enlarge I 1 0 154 Enlarge II 1 1 224 Enlarge III 1 0 414 Enlarge IV 1 2 000 Enlarge V 1 4 000 Zoom 1 0 250 to 4 00 in 1 increments iR5000i 5 min or less at 20 C 168 F iR6000i 6 min or less at 20 C 168 F 5 1sec stream reading right deck Direct A4 LTR non AE straight delivery 3 8 sec book mode right deck picku...

Page 17: ...R A4R B5R 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMT vertical feeding Tracing paper B4 A4 A4R Colored paper Canon recommended vertical feeding 64 to 80 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5R A4R B5R 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMT vertical feed ing Tracing paper A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R Transparency Canon recommended A4 A4R LTR LTRR Colored paper Canon recommended B4 A4 A4R Postcard vertical feeding only Postcard 2 i...

Page 18: ...cy Canon recommedned A4 A4R LTR LTRR Colored paper Canon recommended B4 A4 A4R Postcard vertical feeding only Postcard 2 in 1 postcard vertical feeding only 4 in 1 postcard horizontal feeding only Label sheet Canon recommended B4 A4 A4R LTR LTRR Thick paper 90 to 200 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R LTR LTRR Plain paper 64 to 80 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5R A4R B5R 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMT vertical ...

Page 19: ...9 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMT vertical feeding Colored paper Canon recommended B4 A4 A4R Thick paper 90 to 200 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R LTR LTRR Plain paper 64 to 80 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5R A4R B5R 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMT vertical feeding Colored paper Canon recommended B4 A4 A4R Thick paper 90 to 200 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R LTR LTRR Item Double sided Auto Manual feed tray ...

Page 20: ...t 550 sheets of 80 g m2 250 sheets approx of 80 g m2 10GB 1 Direct Enlarge Reduce 4 0 1 5 1 0mm 4 5 1 8mm 2 Direct Enlarge Reduce 2 5 1 5mm 2 0 1 8 mm 2 Direct Enlarge Reduce 2 5 1 5mm 2 5 2 0 mm 2 Yes 2 min standard may be changed between 0 and 9 min in 1 min increments No Yes 15 min standard may be changed in user mode for 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 90 min and 2 3 4 hr Yes 60 min standard may be chang...

Page 21: ...x XCXxxxxx XCYxxxxx XCZxxxxx iR5000i 1 5 kW or less iR6000i 1 5 kW or less iR5000i 262 Wh iR6000i 282 Wh approx reference approx reference iR5000i 979 Wh approx reference only iR6000i 1008 Wh approx reference only By sound power level impulse mode iR5000i 71 dB or less iR6000i 78 dB or less iR5000i 50 dB or less iR6000i 55 dB or less 0 05 ppm or less Average 643 mm 25 3 in 743 mm 29 3 in 1136 mm 4...

Page 22: ...m B5R 257 182 mm A5R 210 149 mm A3 A5R A3 B5R B4 B5R A3 A4R B4 A4R B5R A5R A4 B5 A3 B4 A5R A3 A4R A3 B5R B4 A4R B4 A5 B5 B4 A3 B5 A4 Paper size A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R B5R A5R A5R B5R B5R A4R A4R A5R B5 B4 A3 A3 B4 B4 B5 A3 A4 copies min 1 to N iR5000i iR6000i 30 30 50 60 36 36 50 60 38 41 40 44 50 60 50 60 40 44 40 44 38 41 38 41 50 60 50 60 36 36 30 30 30 30 36 36 36 36 50 60 30 30 50 60 Delivery by the...

Page 23: ...nt Reproduction ratio Direct Reduce II 50 0 III 64 7 IV 73 3 V 78 6 Enlarge IV 200 0 III 129 4 II 121 4 Size 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LTR LGL LTRR STMTR 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 STMTR 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LTRR 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LGL LGL LTRR STMTR 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LTRR 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LGL 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 Paper size 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LTR LGL LTRR STMTR STMTR LTRR LGL LTRR 279 4 431 8 mm ...

Page 24: ...ions Weight Power supply Operating environment Temperature Humidity Atmospheric pressure Specifications Clawless retard Side tray Plain paper 64 to 80 g m2 A4 B5 LTR Tracing paper SM 1 A4 B5 Colored paper Canon recommended A4 Thick paper 90 to 200 g m2 A4 B5 LTR Height 385 mm approx about 3500 sheets A4 type XCQ xxxxx LTR type XCRxxxxx By size guide plate in steps in service mode OPTION 326 2 W 58...

Page 25: ...perating environment Temperature Humidity Atmospheric pressure Feeding Shifting Delivery direction w shift Shift direction w shift w o shift Specifications Same as host machine Same as host machine LTR LTRR LGL 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 A4 A4R A3 Height 60 mm 2 4 in approx about 500 sheets of 64 g m2 50 mm or less between stacks 20 mm or more within stack between stacks 5 mm 100 mm or less XCSxxxxx 365...

Page 26: ... 1 1 ADF 2 Main power switch 3 Original pickup tray 4 Manual feed tray 5 Right upper cover 6 Right lower cover 7 Waste toner box grip drum protection sheet case 8 Right front paper deck 9 Left front paper deck 10 Cassette 3 11 Cassette 4 12 Front cover 13 Delivery tray 14 Parallel connector for downloading 15 Slot for expansion board 16 Control panel power switch 17 Top panel 18 Reader Unit Image ...

Page 27: ... JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 14 S 1 2 5 4 3 7 8 6 1 Delivery assembly cover 2 Control panel 3 Door switch assembly 4 Feeding assembly releasing lever 5 Service book case 6 Leakage breaker 7 Cassette heater switch 8 Environment switch F01 301 02 External View 2 ...

Page 28: ...00 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 15 S 3 2 Cross Section Printer unit F01 302 01 Cross Section 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 25 23 24 26 28 27 30 29 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 ...

Page 29: ... Manual feed feed roller 17 Manual feed separation roller 18 Registration roller 19 Transfer charging assembly 20 Separation charging assembly 21 Right deck feed roller 22 Right deck separation roller 23 Right deck pickup roller 24 Right deck 25 Cassette 3 pickup roller 26 Cassette 3 feed roller 27 Cassette 3 separation roller 28 Cassette 4 pickup roller 29 Cassette 4 feed roller 30 Cassette 4 sep...

Page 30: ...COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 17 S 3 3 Cross Section Reader unit F01 303 01 Cross Section 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 31: ...01 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 18 S 1 ADF reading glass 2 No 1 mirror 3 Scanning lamp 4 Copyboard glass 5 CCD unit 6 No 3 mirror 7 No 2 mirror ...

Page 32: ...nd control panel power switch Normally it is supplied with power when the main power switch is turned on i e other than in energy saver mode low power mode or sleep mode 1 Control panel power switch 2 Main power lamp 3 Main power switch F01 401 01 Arrangement of Switches 1 2 3 Display Contrast Counter Check ON OFF Reset Guide Clear Power Error Processing Data Start Energy Save Stop Additional Func...

Page 33: ...ror Processing Data Start Energy Save Stop Additional Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 C ID 4 2 Control Panel 1 Counter Check key 2 Display Contrast dial 3 Reset key 4 Number keys 5 Energy Saver key 6 Control panel power switch sub power supply 7 Stop key 8 Start key 9 Main power indicator 10 Clear key 11 Error lamp 12 Processing Data lamp 13 ID key 14 Additional Function key 15 Guide key 16 Touch pan...

Page 34: ... or different sizes on sheets of corresponding sizes Use it to create a margin on the edge of a copy for binding Use it to erase the image of the frame or holes of an original from its copy Use it to reduce 2 4 or 8 originals automatically to print on a single sheet Use it to enlarge a single original automatically by dividing it into 2 or 4 to print on a sheet of a selected size Use it to reverse...

Page 35: ...or the front paper deck each cassette and side paper deck plain paper letterhead recycle paper thick paper colored paper Use it to change the level of power save mode 10 25 50 None Use it to turn on off the mechanism used to assign a function key for disabling sleep mode power save mode on off Use it to set the level of power consumption for sleep mode low high Use it to turn off the mechanism use...

Page 36: ...val from the end of operation to the start of silent mode in which the laser scanner motor is put to rest 0 to 9 min 1 min Use it to set the time at which the control panel power switch is automatically turned off for the day of the week Sunday through Saturday 00 00 to 23 59 1 min intervals Factory setting Use it to register a Preference key on the Ba sic screen Select from mode keys and mode mem...

Page 37: ... the saddle stitcher unit Use it to adjust the position of saddle stitch 2 0 to 2 0 mm 0 1mm incrmenets 0 mm Use it to correct any discrepancy between original and print images occurring while the density adjustment index is kept at the middle 9 steps 5 Mail Box Settings Box Set Store Photo Mode Standard Scan Settings Use it to register set a box 100 boxes max box No 0 to 99 ID No 4 digits file st...

Page 38: ... tor data control ID 7 digits pass word 7 digits administrator name 32 characters administrator mail ad dress administrator contact info ad ministrator comment Use it to register a device name and location Use it to enable disable ID control by group group ID ID No counter upper limit count control count all clear counter print non ID specific job print Use it to delete messages on the bul letin b...

Page 39: ...roller PCB CCD AP PCB Laser driver PCB Reader controller PCB Laser scanner Original Optical path Charging Development Trans fer Manual feed tray Cleaning Cassette 3 Delivery tray Cassette 4 Hard disk Accessory boards Right deck Left deck Paper deck accessory Controller block Control System Original illumination Original Exposure System Image Processing System Laser Exposure System Photosen sitive ...

Page 40: ...oller controls ADF communications F01 502 01 DC controller PCB HVT PCB Potential control PCB CCD AP PCB BD PCB ADF Scanner motor Reader controller PCB Main controller PCB Control panel Inverter PCB LA2 Laser scanner motor M15 M3 IC125 CPU IC1010 CPU IC121 IC122 RAM RAM DC load clutch solenoid motor sensor fan etc Cassette inside paper level detection PCB Duplexing driver PCB DC load clutch solenoi...

Page 41: ...ol card IV accessory Copy data controller accessory J1060 J1022 J5011 Laser scanner motor J5101 J116 J5007 Laser driver PCB J121 J102 J113 DC power supply PCB J101 J113 J113 AC driver PCB J102 J107 J1015 J122 J1017 J6801 J1018 J120 J5003 J104 J105 J2701 J6002 J2101 J2108 J1551 J1532 J1530 Numeric keypad PCB LCD panel LCD Inverter PCB Control panel CPU PCB J6504 J6509 J6604 Reader Differential PCB ...

Page 42: ...F 5 Sheet assemblies Wipe with a moist cloth then dry wipe ADF 6 Platen guide Wipe with a moist cloth then dry wipe ADF 7 White plate Wipe with a moist cloth then dry wipe ADF copyboard cover 8 Read glass Wipe with a moist cloth then dry wipe Reader unit 9 Copyboard glass Wipe with a moist cloth then dry wipe Reader unit 10 Touch panel display Wipe with a moist cloth then dry wipe Printer unit T01...

Page 43: ... a dry soft cloth Likewise clean the sheet around them in the same way F01 601 02 3 Open the C guide and clean the rollers 5 pc in total with a moist cloth while turning he jam removal lever then wipe them with a dry soft cloth Likewise clean the sheet around the rollers in the same way F01 601 03 4 Wipe the rollers 4 pc in total with a moist cloth while turning them then wipe them with a dry soft...

Page 44: ... 1 31 S 5 Close the C guide and the feeder cover and open the ADF Wipe the copyboard glass with a moist cloth then wipe it with a dry soft cloth F01 601 05 6 Clean the white plate and the platen guide with a moist cloth Likewise clean the sheet around the platen in the same way At the end close the ADF F01 601 06 ...

Page 45: ... least once or twice a month as shown be low 6 2 1 Making a Check 1 Press the test button in the machine s bottom left F01 602 01 2 Check to make sure that the open close lever shifts to OFF and the power turns off F01 602 02 3 After making the above check shift the open close lever to ON F01 602 03 4 Enter the date in the Breaker Check Sheet found at the back of the User s Manual ...

Page 47: ...R 2 1 S 1 Basic Operations 1 1 Functional Construction The machine may be divided into the following functional blocks the controller block is shaded in the diagram F02 101 01 Control panel Printer unit Main controller PCB Reader unit Hard disk drive Accessory boards Controller block Image Processing System ...

Page 48: ...ontroller PCB T02 102 01 List of Control Items 1 2 3 Hard Disk Drive Name CPU RAM RAM DIMM ROM Description Controls image processing of input image data from the reader unit Controls image processing of output image data to the printer unit Controls the hard disk drive Controls the network interface DMA controller PCI interface and ROM RAM interface Controls the RAM interface Temporarily stores pr...

Page 49: ...0 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 2 3 S F02 102 01 major PCBs Main controller PCB Printer unit Reader unit Control panel IC1010 CPU RAM Accessory boards IC6501 CPU DIMM ROM Hard disk drive HDD ...

Page 50: ...mmed to read the system software from the hard disk and write it to the SDRAM mounted to the DIMM socket on the main controller PCB For this reason it will be a while before the control panel becomes ready after the main power switch is turned on The control panel shows the following screen while the CPU writes the system software to the SDRAM and the progress of the start up sequence is indicated...

Page 51: ... the boot ROM The self diagnosis program is designed to check the condition of the SDRAM and hard disk and indicates any error it detects on the control panel in the form of an error code F02 103 02 Related Error Code E601 0000 0001 Error in Image Transfer Information E602 0001 0002 Write Read Error Self diagnostic program Boot program Boot ROM CPU SD RAM System area Image data area Main controlle...

Page 52: ...ware from the hard disk to write it to the system area of the SDRAM The machine s system software consists of multiple modules and the appropriate modules needed at a specific time are called into the system area of the SDRAM for execution F02 103 03 Self diagnostic program Boot program Boot ROM CPU SD RAM System area Image data area Main controller PCB Hard disk drive HDD Access to the program at...

Page 53: ... drive Control Card IV accessory Copy Data Controller accessory J1060 J1022 J1015 J122 J1017 J6801 J1018 J1551 J1532 J1530 Keypad PCB LCD panel LCD program PCB Control panel CPU PCB J6504 J6509 J6604 J6506 J6507 J6503 Note The in the diagram indicates major wiring connections and does not indicate the flow of signals J6502 J6601 J6602 J6501 J6603 J6508 J6605 J956 J1061 Reader controller PCB Reader...

Page 54: ...e data after shading Editing Density conversion LUT Binary processing error division text text photo print photo Image memory control Binary processing dither screen print photo 8 Density correction ϒ conversion 8 8 8 Edge emphasis 1 Compression decompression rotation enlargement reduction SDRAM I O control HDD Image server 4 or 2 Thickening 4 or 2 1 Smoothing 1 Binary binary density conversion Pr...

Page 55: ...versal slant mirror fold repeat 2 2 5 Density Conversion LUT In this block luminance image signals are converted into density image signals and pro cessing is performed so that the output density curve best suited to each mode may be ob tained a LOG Conversion A LOG conversion table is used to convert luminance image signals possessing lumi nance data based on reflected light into density image si...

Page 56: ...2001 CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 2 10 S 2 2 7 Binary Processing dither screen The machine s dither screen method is designed to convert the 8 bit image density signal of film photo mode into a 1 bit image density signal binary enabling 144 gradations for binary images 12x12 pixels ...

Page 57: ...ing a When Outputting Read Images In the case of text text photo mode a 600x600 dpi input image is converted into an im age of 1200 600 dpi In smoothing the image data is compared against several hundred templates 7 7 pixel pattern matrixes and each pixel in question is replaced as needed b When Outputting Printer PDL Images The type of smoothing best suited to PDL is performed while converting 30...

Page 58: ...rinter unit page by page until all copying jobs end in other words steps 6 through 10 in the figure are repeated until all jobs are done F02 301 01 Page memory for reading Page memory for printing Read in image processing block Black and white compression circuit extension circuit Print image processing block Reader unit Printer unit Main memory Main memory Compressed data Compressed data Compress...

Page 59: ... function the IP address of the output machine must be registered making the following selections user mode copier mode remote copy print REF If the auto acquisition function for IP address DHCP BOOTP RARP is used in the user s network environment the IP address of the machine is at time forced to change disabling the selected machine to serve as the printer of remote copying F02 301 02 Transmissi...

Page 60: ...copy printer REF If the auto acquisition function for IP address DHCP BOOTP RARP is used in the user s network environment the IP address of the machine is at time forced to change disabling the selected machine to serve as the printer of remote copying F02 301 03 Page memory for reading Page memory for printing Read image processing unit Black and white compression circuit Extension circuit Print...

Page 61: ... transmitting images in either of the following three modes E Mail It sends a scanned image as an attachment to an e mail message to a computer con nected to the network File It sends a scanned image as a file to a file server on the network The following three methods of transmission are available FTP Windows SMB Netware IPX SPX Database It sends a scanned image to a database on the network To ta...

Page 62: ...PCB Note that color and black and white images take different flows inside the machine and use different methods of compression black and white transmission MMR F02 302 01 Transmission side Reader unit Network PCB Work memory for transmission Page memory for reading Read image processing block Black and white imge compression circuit Binary Binary Compressed data Compressed data Compressed data 1 ...

Page 63: ...extension circuit of the image processor PCB and is de veloped into image data decompressed for transmission to the print image processing block it is subjected to smoothing and other processing and then is printed on the printer unit In other words steps 8 through 12 in the figure are repeated until all jobs are done F02 303 01 Print data processing block Print image processing unit Network PCB P...

Page 64: ...system possesses an LPR port function standard installation of Windows NT however will not include the LPR port function To make use of it select the network on the control panel select and add TCP IP as the protocol and select and add TCP IP print as a service A Windows 95 98 machine is not equipped with an LPR port requiring a server with an LPR port and installation of an LPR utility for printi...

Page 65: ...erver The machine checks the presence absence of a job on the print queue on the connected print server at specific time intervals called polling If a print job exits the machine requests the print server to send it the machine starts printing upon its arrival To make NetWare settings make the following selections user mode system control setting network setting NetWare F02 303 03 Protocol IPX Eth...

Page 66: ...Protocol for print services The machine will automatically enable PAP services when AppleTalk is turned on by making the following selections user mode system control setting network setting AppleTalk setting In an AppleTalk environment a print job is sent to the printer directly from each com puter F02 303 04 Protocl AppleTalk EtherTalk Phase II Ethernet Print service PAP ...

Page 67: ... of data written in a page description language In preparation it translates data written in a page description lan guage into data in a language used for internal processing it then generates image data from the resulting data The work is done by a function called translator F02 303 05 Print data processing block Print data internal procesisng language Image data generation block Image data Print...

Page 68: ... is composed of a total of 8 modes each for large size and small size a total of 16 mode types as shown below T02 400 02 Copying printing operation Sensor name Single sided Internal delivery sensor PS35 Double sided Double sided pre registration sensor PS30 Finisher in use Delivery sensor 1 At time of shipment B4 or less to include B4 in the large size category use service mode 2 The machine is no...

Page 69: ...5 Counter 6 1 The notation in parentheses indicates the corresponding counter mode T02 300 02 2 The counter reading may be changed or its display may be enabled disabled in service mode not applicable to counter 1 T02 400 03 Description 1 Total A through L Total large ACEGIK Copy 1 ABGH Copy 1 large AG Pint 1 total CDEF Fax total 1 100V model ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 120 230V model ON ON ON ON OFF O...

Page 70: ...pplies 3 3V all night 3 3 VB 3 3 V non all night 3 3 VA 5 V non all night 5 V 24 V T02 502 01 5 3 Standby Mode normal operation Standby mode is used during normal operation or while the machine is ready for opera tion i e nearly all its power supplies are powered In addition to the main controller PCB the reader unit printer unit and control panel are all ready for communication control 5 4 Power ...

Page 71: ...s in standby mode 5 6 Sleep Mode In sleep mode only the 3 3V all night 3 3 VB power supply is powered The CPU on the main controller PCB stops the programs thereby saving power the pro gram is stopped This mode is used only when the machine is used as a printer equipped with a network print option PDL print option 5 6 1 Shift from Standby Mode standby sleep A shift is made from standby mode to sle...

Page 72: ...ected in user mode 5 7 2 Shift from Low Power Mode low power mode off mode A shift is made from low power mode to off mode under the following conditions The control panel power switch soft switch is off Low power mode has continued for a specific period of time selected in user mode 5 7 3 Return to Standby Mode off mode standby In off mode an auto return to standby mode by means of an external co...

Page 73: ...nter driver The User Software CD ROM of the Kit pro vides PCL5e PCL6 and PostScript 3 printer drivers to support the following operating sys tems Windows 95 98 Windows NT4 0 Windows 2000 Mac OS 8 3 8 6 6 3 Utilities 6 3 1 Netspot NetSpot is a utility program used to manage printers on a TCP IP or an IPX network showing the state of printers and progress of print jobs on PC screens A printer that s...

Page 75: ...r ammonium gas If the site is exposed to direct sunlight provide a curtain 3 The level of ozone generated by the machine is not likely to affect the health of people around it Some individuals however may find its odor unpleasant calling for a good means of ventilation 4 Be sure that the machine s feet will be in contact with the floor and the machine will remain level 5 Be sure that the machine w...

Page 76: ... exist be sure to arrange them so that the exhaust from one will not be drawn into another In general the silicone gas vaporized silicone oil from the fixing assembly will soil corona wires shortening their lives This phenomenon is particularly conspicuous in a low humidity environment Ventilation Wrong 1 Wrong 2 F03 100 02 F03 100 03 ...

Page 77: ... move the machine into or out of the site of installation be sure to observe the following 2 1 Take out the ADF assembly fixing feeding assembly and duplexing unit and move them separately from the body 2 2 When lifting the machine do not use its four grips left right in stead hold it by its four bottom corners 2 3 The machine weighs 210 kg Be sure to work in a group of four 3 Shift up the two adj...

Page 78: ...king the transfer separation primary and pre transfer charging assemblies 5 Mounting the Developing Assembly 6 Mounting the Pickup assembly removing the pickup roller releasing spacers 7 Mounting the Deck Locking Plate left deck 8 Supplying Toner 9 Setting the Cassette 10 Changing the Paper Size for the Front Deck right left changing the paper size selecting the paper size service mode 11 Checking...

Page 79: ...e has been moved off the skids Otherwise the adjusters can trip on the slope plates causing the machine to tumble Take out and open the cardboard box and fit the grip 2 to the front of the machine Be sure to orient the stopper as shown when inserting it Otherwise it can slip off when the body is being lifted Take out the two slope plates from inside the skid Holding the two grips front rear found ...

Page 80: ...the pickup assembly lift the machine slightly to remove the pad Turn over the slope plates then match the pin holes in the skids with those in the slope plates and fit the pins one each Holding the grips front rear found on the machine move the machine off the skid by sliding it on the slope plates Remove the packaging tape from the body From the cardboard box that comes with the machine take out ...

Page 81: ...nt the two reader unit fixings front 1 that come with the machine with RS tighten ing screws 2 As if to insert it into the protrusion of the reader unit fixing front 1 mount the reader unit 3 Remove the three scanner fixing screws 4 You will need to secure the scanner in place when moving the machine Be sure to store away the removed scanner fixing screws 2 4 Installing the Image Reader A1 A Secur...

Page 82: ...TION 3 8 S Step 5 6 7 8 Checks remarks Work Remove the seven mounting screws 5 and detach the reader unit rear cover 6 Mount the two reader unit fixings rear 7 that come with the machine using an RS tightening screw 8 Mount the reader unit rear cover Mount the reader I F cable 9 as shown 5 5 5 6 9 8 7 ...

Page 83: ...test print image shows distortion correct the height of the reader unit using the ad justing wrench that comes with the machine 2 Use the reader unit anti con densation heater that comes with the machine as In case of installing the Image Reader A1 by attaching to the main unit do not throw away a blanking plate and blanking seals included in the package and be sure to keep them Memo 10 Memo ...

Page 84: ...king seal 4 at two locations If you use the ADF after install ing the Image Reader A1 sepa rately from the main unit be sure to open the ADF quietly If you open the ADF roughly the Image Reader might fall down In case of installing the Image Reader A1 separately from the main unit do not throw away the reader fixing brackets two each for the front and rear and be sure to keep them Memo B In case i...

Page 85: ...0i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3 11 S Step 1 Checks remarks Work When detaching the Image Reader A1 from the main unit be sure to hold the locations as indicated in the figure C Caution when detaching the Image Reader A1 from the main unit ...

Page 86: ...ixing feeding assembly releas ing lever 1 in the direction of the arrow left to free the transfer separation charging assembly Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 2 to the front Remove the separation claw releasing member 3 and the tag 4 from the fix ing feeding assembly Remove the tape and glue from the feeding belt Remove the retaining tape of the tags 5 and open the fixing delivery assem bly ...

Page 87: ...001 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3 13 S Checks remarks 7 7 Step 5 6 Work Remove the two fixing nip releasing screws 7 Close the fixing feeding assembly ...

Page 88: ...etach in the left upper direction Check the transfer separation charging as sembly if dirt or paper lint is found clean with alcohol Mount the transfer separation charging as sembly Connect the connector and fit the metal fix ing Do not bring the transfer separation charging assembly into contact with the transfer guide to avoid cutting the gut wire Further be sure that the solvent has evaporated ...

Page 89: ... the screw 10 then shift the charging assembly fixing member 11 in the direction of the arrow right upper and se cure it in place with a screw Disconnect the connector 12 and take out the primary charg ing assembly 13 Check the primary charging as sembly if dirt or paper lint are found clean it with alcohol Disconnect the connector 14 and remove the screw 15 then take out the pre transfer charging...

Page 90: ...pre transfer charging assembly be sure to push it in horizontally in relation to the processing unit thus avoiding damage to the surface of the drum 3 Check to make sure that the one way arm of the pre transfer charging as sembly is on the eccentric cam Close the hopper and connect the connector of the hopper Fit and tighten the three screws and mount the connector cover then fit and tighten the s...

Page 91: ...mbly locking unit 4 in the direction of the arrow rear to detach Take out the developing assembly from the card board box Hold the developing assembly 5 in the middle pocket of the grip and mount it to the machine Connect the connector 6 When mounting the developing assem bly take care not to bring the developing cylinder into contact with the metal plate of the developing assembly base Insert the...

Page 92: ...ckup roller releasing spacer 2 to the right then pull it out to the front Slide out the right deck and the cassette half way and open the right upper cover and right lower cover then remove the pickup roller releasing spacers 3 of the right deck and cassette 3 4 It will be difficult to remove the spacer if the deck cassette is set slide them out halfway to unlock the spacers After removing all spa...

Page 93: ...R 3 INSTALLATION 3 19 S 2 9 Mounting the Deck Locking Plate left deck 1 2 Checks remarks Step 1 2 Work Push the releasing button of the left deck and slide out the left deck Find the deck loking plate 1 in the same package Mount the plate and fasten with the rivet 2 Then close the left deck ...

Page 94: ...a click is heard Pull the shutter black of the body found on the right of the toner supply mouth of the hopper to the right Keep pulling until the shutter stops Pull the shutter of the toner bottle to the right Toner will be supplied from the toner bottle to the hopper Tap on the bottom of the toner bottle to make sure that all toner has moved to the hop per Push the shutter of the toner bottle to...

Page 95: ...h cassette to the hole identified by the marking M 2 A4 A3 Fit the Inch preventing roll that comes with the machine from inside the cassette so that it covers the hole STMT R identified by the marking A 3 and the one LTR R identified by the marking H 4 Be sure there is no gap Perform this step only when the use of Inch configured paper is not planned Set the cassettes to the appropriate sizes to s...

Page 96: ...lide out the deck Remove the screw 4 from the rear edge guide plate 1 and the left guide plate 2 and right guide plate 3 then secure each guide plate to suit the size of the user s choice At time of shipment A4 Slide the deck into the ma chine Attach the appropriate size sticker to the paper size indi cator plate of the deck Turn on the power and regis ter the front deck paper size using service m...

Page 97: ... to register the new paper size using service mode When the wait period is over start service mode and execute toner supply thereby supplying toner from the hopper to the developing assembly 1 Press the following in sequence to start service mode user mode 2 and 8 at the same time and user mode 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL TONER S 3 Check that the following indication has appeared CHECK THE DE...

Page 98: ...from each source of paper Operating noise There must be no abnormal noise Default enlargement reduction The quality of images made at each ratio must be good Multiple copies As many copies as specified must be made normally If there is a difference in density between left and right adjust the height of the pri mary charging wire at the rear to correct At times toner may drop from the drum separati...

Page 99: ...he environment switch must be used If the site requires that the drum cas sette heater remain on while the main power switch is turned off operate the following two switches Environment Switch It is designed for the drum heater and all night heaters and func tions as follows ON all night switch remains on the main power supply switch may be off or on OFF heater remains on only when the main power ...

Page 100: ...lation of an accessory sort etc is planned install it according to the Instal lation Procedure that comes with the accessory Clean up the area around the machine Move the machine to the site of installation and correct it so that it is level using the two adjusters Fill out the Service Sheet 2 17 Connecting to the Network Step 1 2 3 Checks remarks Work Turn off the man power switch of the host Con...

Page 101: ...e connection to the network is not correctly made Perform the troubleshooting work that follows Checks remarks Work Using the PING Function 1 Select PING after making the following selections in service mode COPIER TEST NETWORK PING 2 Enter the IP address using the keypad in the control panel and press the OK key 3 Press the Start key OK appears to indicate that the PING check has been suc cessful...

Page 102: ...or PING If NG is indicated check the TCP IP setting of the machine and execute PING once again If OK is indicated go to 18 3 Making a Check Using the Local Address The local host address is the address of the machine and executing PING using it will enable a check on the network PCB since the address will return after reaching the network PCB 1 Enter the IP address of the machine for PING If NG is...

Page 103: ...ration transfer charging as sembly fixing feeding assembly releasing lever duplexing unit 6 Tape the covers decks and cassettes in place 7 Place A3 paper on the copyboard glass and tape the ADF in place 1 Be sure to observe the following if flights of stairs are used when mov ing the machine into or out of the site of installation 1 1 Take out the ADF fixing feeding assembly and duplexing unit the...

Page 104: ... not be performed if installation of the shift tray or finisher is planned 1 2 1 4 5 3 6 3 Step 1 2 3 Work Open the front cover and slide out the fixing feeding assembly then remove the two screws 1 and detach the delivery roller guide 2 Mount the delivery roll 3 aligning it against the pin 5 in the middle of the delivery roller 4 then secure it in place with an E ring 6 Mount the anti wrap cover ...

Page 105: ...0 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3 31 S 7 8 Step 4 5 6 Work Remove the two screws 7 and detach the reader left cover then mount the magnet catcher 8 Mount the delivery tray Attach the delivery bar 9 Checks remarks 9 ...

Page 106: ...ginal Holder Step 1 Work Mount the original holder 2 to the machine right using the two stepped screws 1 that come with the machine If the original holder is not needed fit the two rubber caps that come with the machine instead If it is difficult to mount the original holder try loosening the two mount ing screws 1 2 Checks remarks ...

Page 107: ...rn off the machine s main power switch Remove the three screws and detach the up per cover Remove the screw and detach the control card base Mount that control card base with a screw 2 shifting the screw hole position so that the control card base will be to the outside of the machine Using a screw 3 mount the card reader 4 to the control card base Disconnect the shorting connector 6 from the conn...

Page 108: ...marks Step 1 2 3 4 Work Remove the upper cover of the controller See the Installation Procedure Connect the plug of the AC adapter to the con troller See the Installation Procedure Remove the four screws 1 and detach the face plate 2 of the rear upper cover Remove the rear upper cover and free the 8 pin cable 3 used to connect the controller from the cable clamp then let the cable hang as shown Be...

Page 109: ...he rear upper cover and draw out the controller cable 4 from where the controller is mounted then connect it to the controller cable 5 Mount the controller 6 to the rear upper cover using four screws 7 Use the screws that come in the box Make various settings and check the operations as instructed in the NE Controller A1 Installation Procedure 4 5 7 6 ...

Page 111: ...anning Direction 2 5R 1 3 2 Changing the Reproduction Ra tio in Sub Scanning Direction 2 5R 2 Scanner Drive System 2 6R 2 1 Outline 2 6R 2 2 Controlling the Scanner Motor 2 7R 2 2 1 Controlling the Motor When Scanning an Image 2 7R 2 2 2 Reversing the Scanner After Scanning in Main Reading Di rection 2 8R 3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp LA2 2 9R 3 1 Outline 2 9R 3 2 Scanning Lamp 2 9R 3 3 Turning ...

Page 112: ... 3 3R 2 4 A D Conversion of the CCD Output 3 3R 3 Digital Image Processing 3 4R 3 1 Outline 3 4R 3 2 Shading Correction 3 4R 3 2 1 Outline 3 4R 3 2 2 Shading Adjustment 3 5R 3 2 3 Shading Correction 3 5R 3 2 4 Edge Gain Correction ADF in use 3 6R 3 3 Auto Density Adjustment AE 3 7R 3 3 1 Outline 3 7R 3 3 2 ABC Circuit 3 7R CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 4 External Covers 3 9R 4 1 Removing the R...

Page 114: ...1 R 1 Functional Construction The reader unit is divided into the following two functional blocks shaded 1 Original exposure block 2 Control block Controller unit Printer unit Reader controller PCB CCD AP PCB Original Original illumination Optical path Original Exposure Block Control Block Reader unit F01 100 01 ...

Page 115: ...The major mechanisms of the reader unit are controlled by the CPU on the reader control ler PCB The functions of the major ICs are as indicated in the following table 2 2 Reader Controller PCB Name CPU RAM EEP ROM ROM Description Controls the sequence of scanner operations Controls the original size detection mechanism Controls the CCD Controls the communications with the ADF Stores service mode d...

Page 116: ...sh level adjustment is executed 1 secs after the scanning lamp turns on F01 301 01 3 2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Book Mode T01 302 01 1 Shading correction gain adjustment and CCD original size detection slash level adjust ment is executed for every job 2 Executed only at the end of a scan job F01 302 01 Name of period SREADY scanner ready SCFW scanner forward SCRV scanner reverse STBY standb...

Page 117: ...Wiring of Major PCBs Controller unit DC controller PCB Note The symbol in the diagram indicates the major wiring route NOT the flow of signals J1061 CCD AP PCB Scanner motor Inverter PCB Reader controller PCB J5011 J5101 J5007 J5003 J6002 Reader Differential PCB J5008 J5502 J9201 J5503 Printer Differential PCB J9203 J5004 J5501 M3 F01 401 01 Wiring of Major PCBs ...

Page 118: ... OFF When the reader controller PCB is OFF 24V OFF heater ON 5V Original sensor PS43 J5006 1 2 3 D_SENS3 J5053 3 2 1 1 2 3 When paper is detected 1 24V Scanner motor J5011 6 5 4 3 2 1 B B A A M3 Rotates in response to alternating 1 and 0 pulse signal Inverter PCB J5102 1 4 J5101 1 3 4 2 J5007 5 3 2 4 J5062 1 3 4 5 5 3 2 1 24V 24V LAMP_ON INV_ERR Reader controller PCB CCD AP PCB J6001 1 2 3 4 J5002...

Page 119: ...ATION 1 6 R Inputs to and Outputs from the Reader Controller PCB 2 2 F01 402 02 Reader controller PCB Printer unit DC power supply PCB J5010 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 1 2 24V GND J5005 1 2 GND 24V GND ADF_RX ADF_TX ADF_ITOP GND 24V GND J8500 See the ADF Service Manual To ADF To ADF connector J5105 ...

Page 121: ...anning direction image processing is per formed by the controller unit In sub scanning direction the speed of the No 1 mirror base is changed 50 or higher in addition the image data is processed by the controller unit lower than 50 2 Using the ADF 25 to 200 In main scanning direction the image data is processed by the controller unit In sub scanning direction the speed at which the origi nals are ...

Page 122: ... PS40 Scanner motor M3 forward reverse Light blocking plate No 1 mirror base Scanning lamp LA2 Scanner HP sensor PS39 F02 101 01 The major components of the original exposure system are as follows Component Scanning lamp Scanner motor Scanner HP sensor Copyboard cover sensor Mirror Notation LA2 M3 PS39 PS40 Description Xenon lamp intensity of 70 000 lx 2 phase stepping motor under pulse control Ph...

Page 123: ...on Point of original size detection 1 The copyboard cover is opened The scanner moves to the point of original size detection 2 The copyboard cover is closed When the original size has been detected the scanner moves to home position 3 The Start key is pressed After shading correction the scanner moves to start position 4 The scanner scans the original 5 The scanner returns to start position at th...

Page 124: ...to the point of original detection 2 The Start key is pressed After the original size has been detected the scanner moves to home position 3 After shading correction in home position the scanner moves to start position 4 The scanner scans the original 5 The scanner returns to start position at the speed used for 50 reduction 6 The scanner moves to the point of original size detection HP Image lead...

Page 125: ...ultiple times when reading image data from the line memory 1 3 2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction The reproduction ratio in sub scanning direction is changed by controlling the speed of the scanner and the speed at which originals are moved For a reduction between 25 and 49 however the main controller unit also functions to change the ratio by processing data 1 To enlarge ...

Page 126: ...rror base Scanner HP sensor PS39 2 Scanner Drive System 2 1 Outline The following parts are associated with the scanner drive system F02 201 01 1 Scanner Motor M3 Control Signal Used to turn on off the motor and to control its direction and speed of rotation 2 Scanner HP Sensor PS39 Detection Signal Used to make sure that the No 1 mirror base is at home position 3 Copyboard Cover Sensor PS40 Detec...

Page 127: ...otor driver turns on off the scanner motor and controls its direction and speed of rotation in keeping with the signals from the CPU IPC and speed control circuit F02 202 01 2 2 1 Controlling the Motor When Scanning an Image When scanning an image the motor is controlled as follows thereby controlling the movement of the No 1 mirror base unit 1 Acceleration Used to accelerate until the speed most ...

Page 128: ... ratio being used E202 HP detection error 1 The No 1 mirror base does not reach the HP sensor within a specific period of time 2 The HP sensor identifies the presence of the No 1 mirror base when the No 1 mirror base should have been moved away E204 image leading edge detection error 1 The image signal is not generated when the No 1 mirror base is moving forward 2 The ADF does not generate the ima...

Page 129: ...s F02 301 01 3 2 Scanning Lamp The machine s scanning lamp is a xenon lamp of a non electrode discharge type in which xenon gas is sealed in a tube On the outside of the glass tube two electrodes are arranged parallel to the tube axis and the inner side of the glass tube is coated with fluorescent material The internal gas discharges and as a result the fluorescent material glows when a high frequ...

Page 130: ...nal INV_ERR in response to an error e g output open short circuit leak in the inverter circuit A fault in the lamp low inten sity activation failure will be identified as an activation error caused by lack of intensity during initial activation e g at time of shading correction E220 It is used to indicate a fault in the inverter PCB E225 It is used to indicate a fault in the scanning lamp xenon tu...

Page 131: ...idth of an original 2 Detecting the Sensor Output Level The scanning lamp is turned on and the CCD level at each point of detection in main scanning direction is measured In addition the reflection type photosensor in sub scanning direction is turned on to measure the sensor output The combination of these output measurements is used to identify the size of the origi nal For specific movements see...

Page 132: ...opened Detection starts of external light in main scanning direction No 1 mirror base to point of original de tection Xenon lamp off Original sensor disabled 3 An original is placed The width of the original is identified in relation to the presence absence of external light here the absence of an original is identified at points in question eliminating B5 B4 A4 and A3 4 The Start key is pressed I...

Page 133: ...etection starts of external light in main scanning direction No 1 mirror base to point of original de tection Xenon lamp off Original sensor disabled 3 An original is set The width of an original is identified in terms of the presence or absence of exter nal light here the external light is blocked and the absence of an original is identified excluding B5 B4 A4 and A3 Point of original detection P...

Page 134: ...iginal size detection starts For main scanning direction the xenon lamp is turned on and the CCD checks for reflected light 4 points For sub scanning direction the original sensor starts detection 5 The copyboard cover is fully closed The changes in the output level of each sensor are monitored until the copyboard cover is fully closed The absence of a change is identified as indicating the ab sen...

Page 135: ...ver and the right upper cover base 3 Remove the reader left cover then de tach the reader front cover 4 Remove the reader controller PCB 5 Move the No 1 mirror base 1 as far as the cut in made in the frame 6 Remove the three screws 2 from the No 1 mirror base and detach the scan ning lamp 3 together with the cable fixing plate 4 F02 501 01 7 Remove the four screws 5 and detach the blanking plate 6...

Page 136: ...connect the connector 8 from the inverter PCB 7 Use a screwdriver and remove the rivet 9 out of the hole on the top of the frame The remove the cable retainer plate 10 F02 501 03 When mounting the scanning lamp be sure to hook the cable 11 on the pulley 13 of the No 2 mirror base 12 without twisting it F02 501 04 10 8 9 7 13 12 11 ...

Page 137: ...e of the scanning lamp is soiled dry wipe it Do not touch the light window of the scanning lamp as when mounting it Do not subject the scanning lamp to im pact If the lamp fell do not mount it back regardless of its condition cracking can occur 5 3 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp Execute CCD auto adjustment in service mode and record the updated CCD adjustment data on the service label 1 CCD Aut...

Page 138: ...emove the reader controller See F03 601 01 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the ADF base right 2 4 Remove the five screws 3 and detach the motor cover 4 F02 601 01 5 Remove the two springs 5 and re move the three screws 6 then while shifting the motor unit 7 in the direc tion of the arrow detach the belt F02 601 02 6 Remove the two screws 8 and detach the scanner motor 10 from the motor base 9 F02 ...

Page 139: ...OSURE SYSTEM 2 19 R 6 1 2 Mounting the Scanner Motor 1 Attach the belt 3 to the pulley 2 of the scanner motor 1 2 Fit the motor base to its position fit the two springs to provide tension to the belt then secure it in place with three screws Use the springs and the screws removed in step5 F02 601 04 3 2 1 ...

Page 140: ...Y9 3009 000 1 Remove the ADF 2 Remove the copyboard glass 3 Remove the reader left cover and the reader front cover 4 Remove the motor cover See steps 1 through 4 used to the motor 5 Remove the five screws 1 and detach the PCB base 2 F02 602 01 6 Remove the screw 3 and detach the ADF base left 4 then remove the three screws 5 and detach the copyboard sensor base 6 F02 602 02 7 Remove the 15 screws...

Page 141: ...EV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2 21 R 11 12 13 10 11 8 Remove the two cable fixing screws 11 of the No 1 mirror base 10 9 Remove the two springs 12 used to secure the cable in place 10 Remove the cable fixing plate 13 and each pulley cable F02 602 04 ...

Page 142: ...ble fixing plate 2 Fit the ball of the cable into the hole of the drive pulley and wind the cable 4 times in ward 5 times outward then tape it in place When winding be sure that the cable metal fixing is inside 3 Hook the cable on each pulley and temporarily fix one end to the cable fixing plate and the other end to the hook of the reader frame 4 Temporarily fix the cable metal fixing to the No 1 ...

Page 143: ...e cut offs in the reader upper frame 2 Secure the positions 2 of the six left right claws using screws 3 Fit the two screws 3 at the end F02 602 06 6 2 3 Positioning the No 1 2 Mirror Base 1 Set the pins of the mirror position tool as indicated F02 602 07 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 Initial FY9 3009 configuration for front Configuration used for the machine for front Initial FY9 3009 configuration for rear Co...

Page 144: ...se and rail The position of the No 2 mirror base is adjusted by sliding the cable fixing plate to the front and the rear F02 602 08 F02 602 09 3 Secure the end of the cable so far tem porarily fixed to the hook of the reader frame using a spring 4 Fully tighten the screw on the cable fix ing plate 5 Fully tighten the cable metal fixing on the No 1 mirror base 6 Detach the mirror positioning tool 7...

Page 145: ...hers 7 1 Removing the Original Size Sensor 1 Remove the copyboard glass 2 Move the No 1 mirror base to the left end 3 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then free the cable from the cable clamp 3 and detach the original sensor unit 4 F02 701 01 When removing the original sensor take care not to damage it against the cable 5 ...

Page 146: ...ensor 1 Remove the ADF unit from the reader unit 2 Remove the reader rear cover 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the ADF base left 2 4 Remove the three screws 3 and detach the fuse base 4 F02 702 01 5 Remove the screw 5 and detach the sensor base 6 then disconnect the connector 7 and detach the HP sensor 8 from the base F02 702 02 1 2 4 3 5 7 6 8 ...

Page 147: ... EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2 27 R 7 3 Removing the Copyboard Sensor 1 Remove the reader rear cover 2 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the fuse PCB base 2 F02 703 01 3 Disconnect the connector 3 and re move the screw 4 then detach the copyboard sensor cover 5 and the copyboard sensor 6 F02 703 02 1 2 3 6 4 5 ...

Page 148: ... Remove the reader rear cover 2 Remove the three screws 1 and free the fuse PCB base 2 from the ADF mounting plate F02 801 01 3 Disconnect the connector 3 and free the harness from the edge saddle 4 then draw out the fuse PCB farther F02 801 02 4 Remove the screw 5 and disconnect the three connectors 6 then detach the fuse PCB 7 F02 801 03 1 2 3 4 2 5 6 6 7 6 ...

Page 149: ...the Inverter PCB 1 Remove the right upper cover and the right upper cover base 2 Remove the reader controller PCB 3 Remove the three screws 1 and de tach the blanking plate 2 F02 802 01 4 Disconnect the two connectors 4 from the inverter PCB 3 F02 802 02 5 Remove the two screws 5 and pull out the inverter unit 6 F02 802 03 1 2 1 4 4 3 5 6 ...

Page 150: ...Remove the two screws 7 and discon nect the connector 8 then detach the inverter PCB 9 F02 802 04 Points to Note When Mounting the Inverter PCB When fitting the inverter PCB 1 into the reader frame be sure to fit the leading edge 2 of the frame of the inverter PCB into the mounting hole in the reader frame F02 802 05 9 7 8 2 1 ...

Page 152: ...D image sensor Number of lines 1 Number of pixels 7450 Size of pixel 4 7 x 4 7 µm 2 Shading Correction Shading adjustment executed in service mode Shading correction executed for each copy 3 Auto Density Adjustment AE Executed for each line in main scanning direction The image processing system consists of the following functional blocks F03 100 01 Each of the PCBs used in the image processing sys...

Page 153: ...t receiving segment photodiode Shift register Output buffer Output buffer Gate Gate 1 2 3 4 5 6 Odd number pixel data Even number pixel data 2 Analog Image Processing 2 1 Outline Analog image processing is performed by the CCD AP PCB which has the following major functions 1 Drives the CCD 2 Corrects the gain in the CCD output corrects offset 3 Performs A D conversion of CCD output F03 201 01 2 2 ...

Page 154: ...amplification are standardized in offset correction on the other hand the output voltage in the absence of in coming light is set to a specific level 2 4 A D Conversion of the CCD Output The analog video signals of odd number and even number pixels after correction are con verted into 8 bit digital signals that correspond to specific pixel voltage levels by the A D converter COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY A...

Page 155: ...ng Correction 3 2 1 Outline The output of the CCD will not necessarily be uniform because of the following factors even if the density of the original in question is perfectly uniform 1 The level of sensitivity of a CCD pixel differs from that of another 2 The level of penetration of light differs between the center and the periphery of a lens 3 The intensity of the scanning lamp differs between t...

Page 156: ...se as the target level during shading correction The adjustment is designed for service mode and is used upon installation of the machine after replacement of the scanning lamp or when correcting changes in the intensity of the scanning lamp oc curring over time 3 2 3 Shading Correction This correction is executed each time an original is scanned The density of the standard white plate is measured...

Page 157: ...in Correction ADF in use In stream reading with the ADF in use the No 1 mirror base is fixed in position To check for changes in the intensity of the scanning lamp the edge gain correction plate gray mounted at the edge of read position is read and a gain that enables the attainment of a specific intensity is computed The result is used to correct the data which otherwise would be affected by chan...

Page 158: ...Outline As in the case of a newspaper some originals have a dark background Auto density cor rection is executed to reproduce the information text graphics of such originals by remov ing the background This adjustment is enabled in density auto mode or when text mode is selected and data is processed by the ABC circuit 3 3 2 ABC Circuit A colored background is identified as being white by changing...

Page 159: ...f stan dard white plate and standard white paper during shading correc tion If a faulty image is generated after executing shading auto adjustment enter the parameter values indicated on the service label COPIER ADJUST CCD EGGN ST Enter an adjustment value for the end gain correction start position COPIER ADJUST CCD EGGN END Enter an adjustment value for the end gain correction end position Enter ...

Page 160: ...R 4 External Covers 4 1 Removing the Reader Left Cover 1 Remove the two removing screws 1 and detach the reader left cover 2 F03 401 01 4 2 Removing the Reader Right Cover 1 Remove the right upper cover and the right upper cover base 2 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the reader right cover 2 F03 402 01 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 161: ...CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 3 10 R 4 3 Removing the Rear Front Cover 1 Remove the right upper cover and the right upper cover base 2 Remove the reader left cover and the reader right cover 3 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the reader front cover 2 F03 403 01 2 1 1 2 ...

Page 162: ...PROCESSING SYSTEM 3 11 R 4 4 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 1 Remove the seven mounting screws 1 and detach the reader rear cover 2 F03 404 01 When mounting the reader rear cover be sure that the sheet at tached to it is not bent Take care so that it is under the copyboard glass F03 404 02 1 1 1 2 3 ...

Page 163: ...t cover and the reader front cover 5 Remove the eight screws 1 and dis connect the connector 2 then detach tje CCD shielding plate 3 F03 501 01 6 Remove the screw 4 and disconnect the connector 5 then free the cable from the cable clamp 6 and detach the original sensor unit 7 F03 501 02 7 Remove the four screws 8 and dis connect the connector 9 then free the flat cable 10 and free the two fixing c...

Page 164: ... 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 3 13 R 5 2 When Replacing the CCD AP PCB Be sure to execute CCD auto adjustment in service mode and record the updated CCD adjustment data on the service label 1 CCD Auto Adjustment COPIER FUNCTION CCD CCD ADJ 2 CCD Adjustment data all items under COPIER ADJUST CCD ...

Page 165: ... the Reader Controller PCB 1 Remove the reader rear cover 2 Remove the differential PCB 3 Disconnect the eight connectors 1 re move the seven screws 2 and remove the flat cable 3 then detach the reader controller PCB 4 F03 601 01 6 2 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB Troubleshooting Chapter 3 Standards Adjustments 7 Electrical 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 4 3 2 ...

Page 166: ...ng the Differential PCB 1 Remove the reader rear cover 2 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the differential PCB mount ing plate 2 F03 603 01 3 Disconnect the connector 3 and re move the flat cable 4 F03 603 02 4 Remove the two mounting screws 5 and two hex screws 6 then detach the Differential PCB 7 F03 603 03 1 2 3 4 7 5 6 ...

Page 168: ...2 6P 1 3 Handling the Laser Unit 1 3P 1 4 Safety of Toner 1 6P 2 Image Formation 1 7P 2 1 Outline 1 7P CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 1 4 1 Outline 2 6P 1 5 Inputs to and Outputs from the Ma jor PCBs 2 7P 1 5 1 Wiring Diagram of Major PCBs 2 7P 1 5 2 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB 2 8P 1 5 3 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB 2 14P CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 1 Outline of Operations 3 1P 1 1 O...

Page 169: ...23P 3 4 2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment fuzzy control 4 24P 3 4 3 Cleaning Mechanism for the Pre Transfer Charging Assem bly 4 25P 3 4 4 Others 4 26P 3 5 Controlling Transfer Charging 4 27P 3 5 1 Outline 4 27P 3 5 2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment fuzzy control 4 28P 3 5 3 Cleaning Mechanism for the Transfer Charging Assembly 4 29P 3 5 4 Others 4 30P 3 6 Controlling...

Page 170: ...Separa tion Charging Assembly 4 64P 7 8 Charging Wire 4 66P 7 8 1 Outline 4 66P 7 8 2 Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Primary Charging Assembly 4 66P 7 8 3 Routing the Charging Wire 4 66P 7 8 4 Routing the Grid for the Primary Charging Assembly 4 69P 7 8 5 Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire 4 71P 7 8 6 Cleaning the Primary Anti Stray Sheet 4 72P 7 9 Developing Assembly 4 73P 7 9 1 Removing...

Page 171: ... System 5 26P 4 1 1 Sending Paper to the Reversing Assembly After Printing on the First Side 5 26P 4 1 2 Sending Paper from the Revers ing Assembly to the Duplexing Feeding Assembly 5 27P 4 1 3 Outline 5 28P 4 2 Sequence of Operations printing 5 29P 4 3 Through Path Operation 5 30P 4 3 1 Outline 5 30P 4 3 2 Outline of Operations 5 31P 4 4 Detecting Horizontal Registration Position 5 35P 4 4 1 Outl...

Page 172: ...Cassette 3 4 5 60P 9 2 13 Removing the Lifter Motor M20 M21 of the Cassette 3 4 5 61P 9 2 14 Adjusting the Position of the Lifter Motor M20 M21 of the Cassette 3 cassette 4 5 61P 9 2 15 Adjusting the Position of the Cassette 3 4 Pickup Solenoid SL3 4 5 63P 9 3 Vertical Path Roller Assembly 5 64P 9 3 1 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 1 5 64P 9 3 2 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2 5 64P 9 3 3 R...

Page 173: ...rocating Mechanism of the Upper Separation Claw 6 10P 3 Controlling the Fixing Temperature 6 11P 3 1 Outline 6 11P 3 2 Temperature Control 6 12P 3 2 1 Normal Sequence 6 13P 3 2 2 Temperature Control by Mode 6 15P 3 3 Detecting Errors 6 18P 4 Disassembly and Assembly 6 20P 4 1 Fixing Assembly 6 21P 4 1 1 Removing the Fixing Feeding Unit 6 21P 4 1 2 Removing the Fixing Assembly 6 22P 4 2 Fixing Roll...

Page 174: ...Functions and Error Codes 7 2P 2 2 Operation 7 4P 2 2 1 Controlling the Speed 7 4P 2 2 2 Sequence of Operations 7 4P 3 Power Supply 7 5P 3 1 Power Supply 7 5P 3 1 1 Outline 7 5P 3 1 2 Distribution of Power Among Switches 7 6P 3 1 3 Output of Power Supplies 7 8P 3 2 Rated Outputs of the DC Power Supply 7 9P 3 3 Protection Mechanism 7 10P 4 Others 7 12P 4 1 Silent Mode 7 12P 5 Disassembly and Assemb...

Page 175: ...Cas sette Pickup Drive Assembly 7 40P 5 6 9 Left Deck Lifter Drive Assem bly 7 42P 5 7 Motor 7 43P 5 7 1 Vertical Path Lower Motor M27 7 43P 5 7 2 Main Motor M2 7 43P 5 7 3 Vertical Path Duplex Motor M25 Vertical Path Upper Mo tor M26 Deck Right Motor M11 Lifter Right Motor M5 and Cassette Pickup Mo tor M12 7 44P 5 7 4 Pre Registration Motor M17 and Drum Motor M1 7 45P 5 8 Solenoid 7 47P 5 8 1 Rig...

Page 176: ...8 23P 3 1 3 Removing the Right Cover 8 23P 3 1 4 Removing the Upper Cover 8 24P 3 2 General Descriptions 8 25P 3 2 1 Disconnecting the Deck from the Host Machine 8 25P 3 2 2 Removing the Compartment 8 27P 3 2 3 Changing the Deck Paper Size Configuration 8 29P 3 2 4 Adjusting the Deck Registration 8 30P 3 2 5 Adjusting the Roll Position 8 30P 3 3 Drive Mechanisms 8 31P 3 3 1 Removing the Deck Picku...

Page 177: ... 3P 3 2 Inputs to and Outputs from the Shift Tray Driver PCB 9 4P 4 Outline of Operations 9 5P 4 1 Shifting 9 5P 4 2 Stacking 9 5P 4 3 Detecting paper 9 6P 4 4 Delivery 9 6P 5 Maintenance and Inspection 9 7P 5 1 Adjusting the Limit Sensor Position 9 7P 5 1 1 Related Service Mode 9 7P 5 1 2 Making Adjustments 9 7P 6 Disassembly and Assembly 9 9P 6 1 Removing the Shift Tray Driver PCB 9 10P 6 2 Remo...

Page 179: ...laser light as long as he she uses the machine under normal operating conditions 1 2 Regulations Under the Center for Devices and Radiologi cal Health The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the Food and Drug Administration US government agency put in force regulations governing laser products on August 2 1976 Under the regulations laser products manufactured on and after August 1 1976 c...

Page 180: ...T 2001 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 2 P F01 102 01 CDRH Label The descriptions on the label may differ among different models of a prod uct ...

Page 181: ...ervicing areas around the laser unit Further it is also important to get into the habit of removing watches rings or the like which could reflect laser light to the eye The machine s laser light is red in color The covers used to block laser light are identified by the following label calling for special attention when servicing behind the covers The label is attached to covers used to block laser...

Page 182: ...YRIGHT 2001 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1 4 P F01 103 02 Laser Caution Label 100 120 V model F01 103 03 Laser Caution Label 230 V model ...

Page 184: ...l amount of dye If your skin or clothes have come into contact with toner remove as much of it as you can with paper and wash with water Do not use hot water to avoid turning the toner into a gel It will fuse with the fibers of cloth making removal difficult Toner tends to react to vinyl and dissolve Do not allow it to come into contact with vinyl material Do not pour toner into fire Such an act c...

Page 185: ...otographic method to form images and is con structed as follows F01 201 01 Construction of the Machine Copyboard glass Scanning lamp Primary charging assembly Pre exposure LED Potential sensor Dust collecting roller Pickup manual feed tray Pickup deck cassette Transfer assembly Separation charging assembly Cleaning assembly Fixing assembly Separation claw Pre transfer charging assembly ...

Page 186: ...e DC Step 3 Laser exposure Step 4 Development AC positive DC Step 5 Transfer negative DC Step 6 Separation AC positive DC Step 7 Fixing Step 8 Drum cleaning Deposits toner on the VD Used also for blank exposure F01 201 02 Static Image Formation Block 1 Pre exposure 2 Primary charging 3 Laser exposure 4 Development 5 Transfer 7 Fixing 6 Separation Delivery Deck cassette Registration Manual feed tra...

Page 188: ...osure block Image formation block Pickup feeding block Control panel DC controller PCB Controller unit Reader unit DC power supply PCB Laser driver PCB Laser scanner Charging Development Trans fer Pickup control Manual feed tray Cleaning Lower feeding assembly Cassette 3 Delivery tray Feeding Sepa ration Fixing Photo sensitive drum Cassette 4 Right deck Left deck Paper deck accessory Control Block...

Page 189: ... T02 102 01 List of Control Items Name CPU RAM DIMM ROM EEP ROM ROM Description Controls jobs Controls state of operation Controls fixing temperature Controls high voltage Controls potential Controls toner supply Controls paper feeding Controls printing sequence Controls output Controls motors Controls finisher accessory Controls communications with controller unit Controls service mode Stores ser...

Page 190: ...tential control PCB BD PCB Reader unit Controller unit Control panel M15 IC125 CPU IC121 IC122 RAM DC loads clutch solenoid motor sensor fan etc Cassette paper level detection PCB Duplexing driver PCB DC load clutch solenoid motor sensor etc IC120 IPC communi cation 2 DIMM ROM IC117 Finisher accessory AC driver PCB IC104 105 IC109 110 IC127 130 EEPROM Laser driver PCB Laser scanner motor ...

Page 191: ...ever does not apply if potential control ended in error or potential control is executed in service mode 4 If the surface temperature of the fixing roller when the power is turned on is 100ºC or lower the primary pre transfer transfer separation charging wire will be cleaned Cleaning is also executed each time 2000 copies have been made Power switch ON Developing bias DC Developing bias AC Bias ro...

Page 192: ...ched 195 C to when it reaches 200 C this is to even out the surface temperature of the fixing roller From when INTR ends to when the drum surface potential for copying has been measured this is to measure the drum surface potential VD VL1 VL2 and to control it From when CNTR1 ends to when the drum surface potential for printing has been measured this is to measure the drum surface po tential VD VL...

Page 193: ...lock pulse signals it will indicate E010 in the con trol panel F02 104 01 Control Block Diagram T02 104 01 Item Power supply drive signal Operating driving Control Error detection Description 24V is supplied by the DC controller PCB from the DC controller PCB MMON Waste toner feedscrew Cleaning assembly Registration roller Manual feed pickup assembly Left deck feed roller 2 Developing assembly uni...

Page 194: ...ion PCB Duplexing driver PCB HVT PCB J103 Laser scanner motor J116 Laser driver PCB J102 J113 DC power supply PCB J101 J113 J113 AC driver PCB J102 J107 J1015 J122 J6801 J1018 J6505 J1012 J120 J104 J105 J2701 J2101 J2108 Control panel PCB M15 J810 J2052 J806 J8492 J4502 J4003 J2511 J2302 J3 Note The symbol in the diagram indicates major connections and does NOT indicate the flow of signals J121 J2...

Page 195: ...B1 5V Right deck lifter sensor PS6 J112 A3 A2 A1 J512 1 2 3 RDLTP J511 A7 A8 A9 A3 A2 A1 5V Right deck paper sensor PS7 J112 A6 A5 A4 J513 1 2 3 RDPD J511 A4 A5 A6 A6 A5 A4 5V Deck right limit sensor PS8 J112 B9 B8 B7 J518 1 2 3 RDEL J511 B1 B2 B3 B9 B8 B7 5V Deck left open closed sensor PS9 J115 A15 A14 A13 J569 1 2 3 LDEOP J561 1 2 3 15 14 13 J113 A15 A14 A13 J8508 1 2 3 J801 A1 A2 A3 A15 A14 A1...

Page 196: ...J541 A4 A5 A6 A6 A5 A4 5V Cassette 3 open closed sensor PS15 J110 A12 A11 A10 J535 1 2 3 C3OP J531 B7 B8 B9 B3 B2 B1 5V Cassette 4 open closed sensor PS16 J110 B12 B11 B10 J545 1 2 3 C4OP J541 B7 B8 B9 B3 B2 B1 5V Cassette 3 lifter sensor PS17 J110 A3 A2 A1 J532 1 2 3 C3LTP J531 A7 A8 A9 A3 A2 A1 5V Cassette 4 lifter sensor PS18 J110 B3 B2 B1 J542 1 2 3 C4LTP J541 A7 A8 A9 A3 A2 A1 When paper is d...

Page 197: ...D J801 A10 A11 A12 A6 A5 A4 5V Vertical path 2 paper sensor PS25 J113 A3 A2 A1 J1521 1 2 3 VP2PD J801 A13 A14 A15 A3 A2 A1 5V Vertical path 3 paper sensor PS26 J110 A15 A14 A13 J536 1 2 3 VP3PD J531 B4 B5 B6 B6 B5 B4 5V Vertical path 4 paper sensor PS27 J110 B15 B14 B13 J546 1 2 3 VP4PD J541 B4 B5 B6 B6 B5 B4 J803 1 2 3 3 2 1 J802 1 2 3 3 2 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When ...

Page 198: ...J2306 A12 A11 A10 J222 A1 A16 J2302 A1 J227 1 2 3 LDPFS J107 A16 J235 1 2 3 J107 B14 DPDS J234 4 5 6 3 2 1 Duplexing driver PCB J2306 B8 B7 B6 J222 B3 B14 J2302 B3 J274 1 2 3 8 7 6 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 5V Laser write start sensor PS28 J113 B3 B2 B1 J1519 1 2 3 LWRPD J801...

Page 199: ...sensor upper PS49 J115 B9 B8 B7 J573 1 2 3 LDPD1 J5701 4 5 6 3 2 1 5V Left deck paper level sensor lower PS50 J115 B12 B11 B10 J574 1 2 3 LDPD2 J5701 1 2 3 6 5 4 J251 B16 B5 J274 4 5 6 5 4 3 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 Reversal sensor 1 PS37 J107 B15 J1513 1 2 3 RVS1 Reversal s...

Page 200: ...1 2 3 J801 B10 B11 B12 B6 B5 B4 J810 1 2 3 J801 B7 B8 B9 B9 B8 B7 C3PLV The voltage changes according to the width of paper The voltage changes according to the number of sheets The voltage changes according to the number of sheets The voltage changes according to the width of paper The voltage changes according to the width of paper The signal changes according to the length of paper The signal c...

Page 201: ...suit the drum surface potential See p 4 5P HUM1 5V HUM OUT TH J113 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 J8492 1 2 3 4 5 J801 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 When the humidity inside the machine increases the voltage decreases analog signal When the temperature inside the machine increases the voltage decreases analog signal When the temperature of the fixing roller increases the voltage decreases analog signal When t...

Page 202: ...B17 CL1 J261 2 1 1 2 J251 A16 A15 A5 A6 J717 2 1 1 2 Fixing assem bly inlet guide drive solenoid 24V Manual feed releasing solenoid MFLSD When 0 ON J726 2 1 7 8 Cassette 3 pickup solenoid Cassette 4 pickup solenoid SL2 24V SL1R When 0 the plunger is pushed i e the inlet guide lowers J252 6 5 4 8 9 10 SL1 24V C3PUSD When 0 ON SL3 24V C4PUSD When 0 ON SL4 J106 A13 A14 Delivery flapper solenoid 24V R...

Page 203: ... speed rotation returns the CLK signal to the PCB While the fan is rotating 1 24 V for full speed 12 V for half speed While in constant speed rotation returns the CLK signal to the PCB While the fan is rotating 1 24 V for full speed 12 V for half seed While in constant speed rotation returns the CLK signal to the PCB While the fan is rotating 1 24 V for full speed 12 V for half speed While in cons...

Page 204: ...418 2 1 J105 13 M5 Motor driver PCB To DC power supply PCB From DC power supply PCB From DC power supply PCB To DC power supply PCB J163 2 1 3 4 J193 2 1 1 2 PCLM1 PCLM2 J103 A1 A2 M7 J151 2 1 1 2 J191 2 1 1 2 J106 A8 A7 M8 J252 7 8 7 6 J251 A13 A14 A8 A7 J260 1 2 2 1 PTRCLM1 PTRCLM2 5V When 1 CCW rotation reverse When 1 CW rotation forward TSCLM1 TSRCLM2 When 1 CCW rotation reverse When 1 CW rota...

Page 205: ...M11_A 24V J104 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 M12_B M12_B M12_A M12_A 24V J2101 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 J2104 2 5 1 3 6 4 M12 Motor driver PCB Motor driver PCB M13_B M13_B M13_A M13_A 24V M13 J268 2 5 6 4 1 3 5 2 1 3 6 4 J106 A19 A16 A15 A17 A20 A18 J251 A2 A5 A6 A4 A1 A3 A19 A16 A15 A17 A20 A18 M14_B M14_B M14_A M14_A Reversal motor 24V J2302 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 J2305 8 11 7 9 12 10 M14 Duplexing driver...

Page 206: ...1 B4 J2101 B1 J2101 B2 J2102 14 17 18 16 13 15 J414 5 2 1 3 6 4 2 5 1 4 1 3 M18_B M18_B M18_A M18_A M18 Fixing feeding relay PCB From DC power supply PCB J107 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 J2302 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 J2305 2 5 1 3 6 4 J231 5 2 6 4 3 1 2 5 1 3 4 6 J106 B17 B16 B15 B18 M19LD M19 J612 2 3 4 1 M19ON 24V 0V 0V J611 1 2 J251 B4 B5 B6 B3 B17 B16 B15 B18 J105 11 C3MLD Motor driver PCB J2108 3 J2106...

Page 207: ... B14 B13 B12 B11 J2101 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 J2102 8 11 7 9 12 10 J412 5 2 6 4 1 3 2 5 1 3 6 4 Vertical path lower motor M27_B M27_B M27_A M27_A M27 Motor driver PCB J104 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 J2101 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 J2110 2 5 1 3 6 4 While in rotation alternates between 1 and 0 pulse signal While in rotation alternates between 1 and 0 pulse signal While in rotation alternates between 1 and 0 puls...

Page 208: ...ry charging Transfer charging Dust collecting roller Developing assembly Pre transfer charging Separation charging J7371 See descriptions on charging control in Chapter 4 J122 J1015 See descriptions on the controller unit See descriptions on the paper deck in Chapter 8 J123 J751 See descriptions on the shift tray in Chapter 9 grid wire primary charging wire J111 J03 J719 Paper deck accessory Shift...

Page 210: ...e parallel beam The resulting laser beam is directed through an imaging lens and is reflected by a polygon mirror which is rotating at a high and by upon by which the beam is turned into a scanning beam possessing a specific direction The laser beam is then led through an imaging lens for removal of distortion and is di rected to the positively charged photosensitive drum areas representing white ...

Page 211: ...ser all with considerations to high speed low power and low noise operation Components Laser semiconductor Laser scanner motor M15 Polygon mirror BD mirror BD PCB Laser driver PCB DC controller PCB Description Visible laser light aboxut 660 nm 1 beam DC motor 2 speed control 12 faceted Detects a laser beam Controls laser activation Controls laser scanner motor rotation Collimator lens Imaging lens...

Page 212: ...ic Sequence of Operations Main power switch ON Original set ADF opened Start key ON 195 C Image leading edge signal PTOP Laser PRINT INTR INTR WMUP CNTR LSTR LSTR STBY STBY BD signal BD Laser scanner motor M15 If silence mode has been selected in user mode a switch over to half speed rotation is made after a specific period of time during in wait rotation In wait rotation In wait rotation ...

Page 213: ...reflected by the BD mirror mounted along the path of the laser beam The CCD AP PCB reads image signals from the CCD and sends them to the controller unit The controller unit performs image processing and the signals are sent to the laser driver PCB as video signals through the DC controller PCB they are then sent to the laser unit as laser intensity control signals in sequence F03 201 01 Construct...

Page 214: ... memory 4 Video signals are generated 5 The 2 pixel parallel signal is converted into a 1 pixel serial signal 6 The laser drive signal drives the laser in response to the video signals F03 202 01 Flow of Signals E100 It is indicated if the BD signal is not detected within a specific period of time after the laser has been turned on BD 1 J2701 J120 J1015 J122 J122 J117 J2502 J1015 GND 5V VIDEO 4 LD...

Page 215: ...1 Laser drive signal 2 Sample laser activation signal Used to turn on laser light for an intensity sample for each scan 3 Laser enable signal Goes 0 when the laser becomes ready after the Start key has been pressed 4 Laser write start signal Used to start a laser write when paper reaches the laser write start sensor PS28 mounted in front of the registration roller 5 The intensity of laser light is...

Page 216: ...n pickup is from the manual feed tray in re sponse to the detection of paper by the registration paper sensor PS29 J117 J113 J121 LD 1 LD DT 7 LD EN 3 LSH 2 LD 1 GND LWRPD 4 Laser driver PCB DC controller PCB J2502 6 J2501 Laser assembly Laser Intensity monitor 5 Laser drive circuit EEPROM 3 2 1 B5 20 19 18 16 15 14 12 11 10 8 7 3 2 1 17 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 10 11 13 14 18 19 20 4 4 3 2 1 GND GND GND GND...

Page 217: ...l mechanism for copying DISPLAY DPOT LPOWER P Indicates the result of potential control mechanism for the laser intensity during output of printer PDL images DISPLAY DPOT LPOWER C Indicates the result of the potential control mechanism for the laser intensity during output of copy images DISPLAY MISC LPOWER Indicates the laser intensity on a real time basis ADJUST LASER PVE OFST Use it to adjust t...

Page 218: ...peed when 1 in wait rotation i e switching the speed 3 Laser scanner motor ready signal When 0 the laser scanner motor is rotated at a con stant speed constant speed rotation control F03 401 01 Functional Block Diagram E110 It is indicated under the following conditions 1 If the laser scanner motor ready signal LMRDY goes 1 when the motor is rotating 2 If the laser scanner motor ready signal LMRDY...

Page 219: ...indicated the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it 3 The screws must be identified by type length diameter and location 4 The mounting screw of the grounding wire and the varistors is equipped with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity They must not be left out when fitting the screws 5 As a rule the machine must not be operated with any of its parts re...

Page 220: ...RE SYSTEM 3 11 P 5 1 Scanner Unit 1 Open the front cover 2 Open the hopper cover 1 then re move the three screws 2 remove the connector cover 3 and disconnect the connector 4 F03 501 01 3 Slide out the hopper unit 5 F03 501 02 4 Remove the two screws 6 and detach the toner dish 7 F03 501 03 2 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 221: ...h the scanner cover 11 F03 501 04 7 Disconnect the connector 12 and slide out the developing assembly 13 then detach the hopper slot 14 Disconnect the four connectors 15 and remove the four screws 16 then slide out the scanner unit 17 F03 501 05 When replacing the scanner unit be sure to execute the fol lowing in service mode if the fixing assembly is 150 C or higher otherwise potential con trol w...

Page 223: ...Turning on off the Pre exposure LED Array Potential Control 1 Setting the primary current 2 Setting the laser output 3 Setting the developing bias DC 1 Primary charging wire 2 Pre transfer charging wire 3 Transfer charging wire 4 Separation charging wire DC constant current control set by potential control DC constant voltage control fixed by varistor Control value 850 V approx AC constant voltage...

Page 224: ...FORMATION SYSTEM 4 2 P The image formation system is constructed as follows F04 101 01 Developing assembly Dust collecting roller Pre transfer charging assembly Transfer guide Transfer charging assembly Separation charging assembly Cleaner unit Pre exposure Primary charging assembly Potential sensor ...

Page 225: ...pying 2 potential control for printing Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON Start key ON INTR WMUPR WMUP SLEEP STBY Fixing assembly temperature 195 C 200 C Drum motor M1 Pre exposure LED Primary charging Pre transfer charging bias AC Grid bias Developing clutch CL4 Developing bias AC Developing bias DC Dust collecting roller bias DC Separation charging bias DC Laser activation Main m...

Page 226: ...on of images thereby stabiliz ing the drum potential 2 executes image formation 1 3 executes image formation 2 Start key ON PRINT LSTR STBY STBY INRT 2 1 3 Drum motor M1 Pre exposure LED Primary charging Pre transfer charging bias AC Grid bias Developing clutch CL4 Developing bias AC Developing bias DC Dust collecting roller bias DC Separation charging bias DC Laser activation Main motor M2 Pre tr...

Page 227: ...ontrolling potential for the copier printer 2 Correcting power APC i e Auto Power Control 3 Determining primary current VD control 4 Determining laser output VL control 5 Determining developing bias DC VDC control The control system related to potential control is designed as follows Primary charging wire Potential sensor Laser light Developing cylinder DC controller PCB Laser driver PCB High volt...

Page 228: ... limit the consumption of toner The potential is controlled at such times as shown below and is of the nature described 10 and 60 min after main power switch is turned on Sensitivity potential control in keeping with changes in drum temperature To suit changes in the efficiency of charg ing At the start of the first job 10 and 60 min after the main power switch is turned on OFF not executed defaul...

Page 229: ...lows of VD 8 times max of VL1 8 times max of VL2 once 2 Potential control for printing potential is measured as follows of VD 8 times max of VL1 8 times max of VL2 once COPIER OPTION BODY PO CNT turning on off potential control 0 potential control OFF 1 potential control ON WMUPR WMUP STBY Fixing assembly temperature 195 C 200 C Drum motor M1 Primary charging Laser Potential sensor Potential contr...

Page 230: ...ower on the primary current laser output and developing bias DC value are determined for copying and printing and the ratio is stored in memory When potential is controlled again after power on potential control for the preceding mode used is executed for the other the ratio obtained at power on is used The following shows the sequence of operations for reduced mode F04 201 03 Numeric constant set...

Page 231: ...alid when 1 is set to COPIER OPTION TEMPO F POT SW 0 for text oriented users originals with low image ratio default 1 for photo oriented users originals with high image ratio 2 to prevent re transfer white spots near 50 mm of leading edge COPIER OPTION TEMPO F HUM SW Enter 1 if the environment sensor is faulty out of order Use it as an emergency remedy until the environment sensor is replaced COPI...

Page 232: ...NT DE OFST adjusting Vdc for copying COPIER ADJUST V CONT VD OFST entering offset value for VD target potential for copying COPIER ADJUST V CONT DE OFS P adjusting Vdc for printing COPIER ADJUST V CONT VD OFS P entering offset value for VD target potential for printing COPIER FUNCTION DPC OFST adjusting potential sensor off set Enter the value indicated on the service label if the RAM on the DC co...

Page 233: ...ller PCB compares the surface potential of the drum against the target po tential if the measured potential is 6 V or higher than the target value the primary current is corrected and the potential is measured once again The potential is measured as many as eight times and the primary charging current is corrected as many as eight times F04 202 01 WMUPR WMUP STBY 200 C Potential sensor Primary cha...

Page 234: ... measured potential is 6 V or higher the potential of the laser output is cor rected and the potential is corrected once again The potential is measured as many as eight times and the laser output is corrected as many as eight times In addition the developing bias for light area VL2 is measured under the corrective conditions used to determine the laser output LP needed for target potential F04 20...

Page 235: ...In terms of printing potential Vdc 85 to 110 V The potential for printing varies in keeping with the reading of the environment sensor to ensure the reproduction of appropriate line widths F04 204 01 WMUPR WMUP STBY 200 C Potential sensor Selected potential Laser Primary charging Vpc Vpc LP0 Vpc Potential control sequence start VD VL1 VL2 Vdc VD Vdc Photosensitive drum Developing cylinder Potentia...

Page 236: ...e average of potential levels is obtained Based on the result an appropriate correc tive value is obtained for the laser output If measurement is not possible for some difficulty as in measuring between sheets the attempt at measurement is continued for a further 1 min Potential control for copying Potential control for printing Main power switch ON Fixing assembly temperature end of fixing assemb...

Page 237: ...e is used for the next job Timing During last rotation for the first job 30 min after the laser output correction Potential measurement The drum potential shows a discrepancy around the drum periphery so that the average of potential levels is obtained Based on the result an appropriate correc tive value is obtained for the laser output COPIER OPTION BODY LAPC SW switching laser APC correc tion 0 ...

Page 238: ...ustment During Printing Purpose Density adjustment is executed to obtain a level of density suited to the needs of the user Correction The developing bias is corrected in keeping with the F value setting and it is also performed as part of image processing 2 6 1 Density Adjustment During Copying The developing bias is raised to decrease the copy density Too high a developing bias will result in ha...

Page 239: ...re corrected and correction is also executed as part of image process ing thickening 1 All may be set to yes using fine line correction in user mode T04 206 02 COPIER OPTION BODY CNT W PR turning on off variable density mode during printing 1 corrects target value to enable changing of density during printing default 0 disables changing of density during printing F value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Developi...

Page 240: ...ed with a pre exposure LED array to prevent adhesion of excess toner to the photosensitive drum because of residual charge and its system of control serves the following functions 1 Turning On Off the Pre Exposure LED Array F04 301 01 The system uses the following signals 1 pre exposure LED control signal when 0 LED turns on DC controller PCB Pre exposure lamp J103A 24V PEXP 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10...

Page 241: ...primary charging leakage detection signal 0 upon detection of an excessively high or low level of current 2 primary corona current control signal the output of the primary corona current turns ON when the voltage is about 3 V or higher or lower than 11 V it turns OFF when the level is about 12 V or higher 3 high voltage remote signal turns on off the output of primary corona current DC controller ...

Page 242: ... 100 C or lower at power on 2 If wire cleaning is executed in user mode 3 At the end of making 2000 prints 1 after the end of cleaning 1 Default may be changed in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY W CLN P F04 302 02 The following signals are used 1 primary charging wire cleaning motor CCW drive signal 1 when 1 the wire cleaner moves to the rear 2 primary charging wire cleaning motor CW drive signal ...

Page 243: ...id bias Enter the value indicated on the service label if the RAM on the DC con troller PCB has been replaced COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING WIRE CLN Execute auto cleaning if five round trips the primary charging wire or the transfer charging wire has been replaced COPIER OPTION BODY W CLN P Set the intervals at which auto cleaning of the primary charging wire is ex ecuted in terms of the number of prin...

Page 244: ...re moved by a scraper The dust collecting roller bias is controlled for the following 1 Turning on off the dust collecting roller bias The system used to control the dust collecting roller is constructed as follows F04 303 01 The following signal is used for the system 1 dust collecting roller bias remote signal if 1 the dust collecting roller bias turns on DC controller PCB High voltage PCB J102A...

Page 245: ...ging leakage detection signal 0 when an excessively high or low level of current is detected 2 pre transfer charging control signal the output of pre transfer current turns ON when the voltage is about 3 V or more and less than 11 V it turns OFF when the voltage is about 12 V or more 3 pre transfer separating charging remote signal turns on off the output of the pre trans fer separation current DC...

Page 246: ... e base on the data from the environment sensor F04 304 02 COPIER OPTION BODY FUZZY turning on off fuzzy control 0 fuzzy control ON default 1 low humidity mode uses a lower than standard pre transfer charging current 2 normal humidity mode 3 high humidity mode use higher than standard pre transfer charging current Setting it to 1 through 3 will make the control independent of the read ing from the...

Page 247: ...r at power on 2 When wire cleaning is executed in user mode 3 At the end of last rotation for printing of each 2000 prints 1 1 Default may be changed in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY W CLN P F04 304 03 The following signals are used 1 pre transfer charging wire cleaning motor CW drive signal when 1 the wire cleaner moves to the rear 2 pre transfer charging wire cleaning motor CCW drive signal wh...

Page 248: ...output for high voltage unit Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new high voltage unit if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared or the high voltage unit has been replaced COPIER ADJUST HV TR D PRE TR entering offset value of pre transfer high voltage output of DC controller PCB Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new DC controller PCB if the RAM on...

Page 249: ...01 The system uses the following signals 1 transfer charging leakage detection signal 0 when an excessively high or low current is detected 2 transfer charging current control signal when about 3 V or higher and lower than 11 V the output of the transfer current turns ON when about 12 V or higher it turns OFF 3 high voltage remote signal turns on off the transfer current output DC controller PCB H...

Page 250: ...ed using data from the environment sensor F04 305 02 COPIER OPTION BODY FUZZY turning on off fuzzy control 0 fuzzy control ON default 1 low humidity environment mode pre transfer charging current lower than standard 2 normal humidity environment mode 3 high humidity environment mode pre transfer charging current higher than standard Setting it to 1 through 1 will make control independent of the en...

Page 251: ...en cleaning is executed in user mode 3 At the end of making 2 000 prints 1 after cleaning 1 Default may be changed in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY W CLN P F04 305 03 The system uses the following signals 1 transfer charging wire cleaning motor CW drive signal when 1 the wire cleaner moves to the rear 2 transfer charging wire cleaning motor CCW drive signal when 1 the wire cleaner moves to the f...

Page 252: ...the transfer high voltage output of the high voltage unit Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new high voltage unit if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared or the high voltage unit has been replaced COPIER ADJUST HV TR D HV TR Use it to enter the offset value for the thermistor high voltage output of the DC controller PCB Enter the value on the label attached to the...

Page 253: ...alue for pickup from the cassette 3 COPIER OPTION BODY TR SP C4 Use it to switch the transfer separation output value for pickup from the cassette 4 COPIER OPTION BODY TR SP MF Use it to switch the transfer separation output for pickup from the manual feed tray COPIER OPTION BODY TR SP DK Use it to switch the transfer separation output for pickup from the side pa per deck The transfer separation o...

Page 254: ...riginal used sur face potential of the drum fuzzy control The system used to control separation charging is constructed as follows F04 306 01 DC controller PCB J102A J4502 AC DC J4505 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PT SP REMOTE 2 PT SP LEAK DETECT 1 SP CNT 3 High voltage PCB 3 2 1 High voltage AC transformer 500µA The level of current of the DC bias v...

Page 255: ...ation charging leakage detection signal 0 when an excessively high or low level of current is detected 2 separation charging current control signal when about 3 V or higher and lower than 11 V the output of the separation current turns ON when about 12 V or higher it turns OFF 3 separation charging remote signal turns on off the output of the separation current ...

Page 256: ...tance the output is decreased to make up for this 2 If the potential of the drum is low increase the output to prevent separation faults 3 If the potential of the drum is high decrease the level of current to prevent double trans fer COPIER OPTION BODY FUZZY turning on off fuzzy control 0 fuzzy control ON default 1 low humidity mode uses a lower than standard level of pre transfer charging current...

Page 257: ...voltage of the DC controller PCB Enter the value indicated on the new DC controller PCB if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared or the DC controller PCB has been re placed COPIER OPTION BODY TR SP C1 Use it to switch the transfer separation output value for pickup from the right deck COPIER OPTION BODY TR SP C2 Use it to switch the transfer separation output value for pickup from the ...

Page 258: ...line The following component parts are associated with the hopper developing assembly F04 401 01 Feed screw Developing assembly toner sensor TS1 M1 CL1 Developing assembly clutch Developing cylinder Toner feed screw Toner feed screw M10 Angled feed screw Stirring rod Hopper toner sensor TS2 M9 Hopper stirring motor Hopper supply motor Main motor Toner supply ...

Page 259: ...e Drive to the Hopper Developing Assembly The system used to control the drive of the developing assembly is constructed as follows F04 402 01 CL1 Developing assembly clutch M1 DC controller PCB M10ON 1 24V J103B 1 5 6 7 8 M9ON 2 24V M1_ON 0V M1_LCK 5V J108A 1 9 10 11 12 DEVCD 3 24V J108B 1 2 M10 M9 Hopper stirring motor Hopper supply motor ...

Page 260: ... FORMATION SYSTEM 4 38 P The following signals are used 1 hopper stirring motor drive signal when 0 the motor rotates to stir the toner 2 hopper supply motor drive signal when 0 the motor rotates to supply toner 3 developing assembly clutch drive signal when 0 the developing assembly clutch turns on ...

Page 261: ... DC bias current control signal if about 3 V or higher and lower than 11 V the output of developing DC bias current turns ON if about 12 V or higher it turns OFF 2 developing DC bias remote signal turns on off the output of developing DC bias cur rent DC controller PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DEV AC REMOTE 2 DEV DC CNT 1 Developing cylinder J45...

Page 262: ...w high voltage unit if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared or the DC controller PCB has been replaced from 100 to obtain lighter images to 100 to obtain darker images COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP D HV DE Use it to enter the offset value for the output of developing high voltage of the DC controller PCB Enter the value indicated on the label attached to the DC controller PCB if the RAM on th...

Page 263: ...pply of Toner The following component parts are associated with the toner supply system F04 404 01 The following signals are used 1 developing assembly toner level detection signal when the absence of toner is detected 0 2 hopper toner level detection signal when the absence of toner is detected 0 TS2 TS1 DC controller PCB 1 7 8 9 J103A TEP 2 0V DTEP 1 5V 5V 0V 1 9 10 11 J103B ...

Page 264: ...gnal 1 is detected for 0 7 sec or more The level of toner inside the hopper is monitored by the hopper toner sensor while toner is supplied by the hopper motor or toner is being stirred When the toner inside the hopper drops below a specific level the hopper toner level de tection signal goes 0 When the DC controller PCB detects the signal for 1 9 sec or more the machine will indicate the Add Tone...

Page 265: ...0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 43 P 5 Drum Cleaner Unit 5 1 Outline The following component parts are associated with the drum cleaner unit F04 501 01 Pre exposure lamp LED Cleaning blade Separation claw Magnet roller Auxiliary roller Waste toner feedscrew ...

Page 266: ...TION SYSTEM 4 44 P 5 2 Detecting the Waste Toner The system used to detect waste toner full condition is constructed as follows F04 502 01 DC controller PCB Waste toner bottle front J108A J107 M1_ON M1_LCK 0V WT RCK 5V 0V 1 10 9 11 12 1 17 18 M1 Main motor To MSW1 Waste toner feedscrew lock detection MSW1 ...

Page 267: ...0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 45 P E013 waste toner lock It is indicated when the waste toner lock sensor MSW2 remains on for 4 sec or more Memo The waste toner bottle is capable of holding as much toner as may be used for a maximum of about 500 000 prints ...

Page 268: ...ignals are used 1 drum heater drive control signal when 1 AC power is supplied to the drum heater control PCB 2 thermistor temperature detection signal feeds voltage of a level suited to the detected temperature DC controller PCB AC driver PCB Drum heater control PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 J2002 W1 W2 2 J2053 J102B J2053 J2052 Environment switch SW3 Controlled to 43 C 0V HT TEMP 2 AC DRUM HT ON 1 Drum heater...

Page 269: ...t cover open Power save mode Environment sensor SW3 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Drum heater H3 Half wave OFF Full wave Full wave Half wave full wave if 120 230V Half wave full wave if 120 230V Half wave full wave if 120 230V Half wave full wave if 120 230V Full wave Full wave Full wave Full wave Main motor M2 OFF Main motor M2 ON Turning On Off the Drum Heater ...

Page 270: ...tion SW2001 1 on the drum heater control PCB may be turned on to change from 43 C to 47 C default OFF control at 43 C If the switch is turned on controlled to 47 C in a low temperature humidity environment little moisture in the air however printing of halftone images can cause fusion requiring the operation of the switch to suit the environment as follows 1 Remove the drum heater control PCB See ...

Page 271: ... indicated the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it 3 The screws must be identified by type length diameter and location 4 The mounting screw of the grounding wire and the varistors is equipped with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity They must not be left out when fitting the screws 5 As a rule the machine must not be operated with any of its parts r...

Page 272: ...t cover and slide out the hopper unit to draw out the fixing feed ing unit 2 Take out the process unit See p 4 54P 3 Remove the primary charging assembly 4 Remove the potential sensor unit 5 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and remove the potential sensor rail stay 2 6 Disconnect the connector 3 and re move the two mounting screws 4 then detach the pre exposure lamp unit 5 F04 701 01 F04 701 02 1 ...

Page 273: ...rger paper 2 Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum in an area sub ject to the direct rays of the sun 3 Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum in an area sub ject to high or low temperature or humidity or where temperature or hu midity tend to fluctuate rapidly 4 Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum in an area sub ject to dust ammonium gas or...

Page 274: ...m when re moving it The bearing at the rear and the gear at the front of the drum need not be removed F04 702 03 If the temperature of the fixing assembly is 150 C or higher when replacing the drum unit be sure to execute the following in service mode otherwise po tential control will not be ex ecuted COPIER FUNCTION DPC DPC 7 2 2 Replacing the Drum Heater 1 Remove the photosensitive drum from the...

Page 275: ...nnect the connector 4 and de tach the drum heater 5 from the photo sensitive drum F04 702 05 7 2 3 Mounting the Photosensitive Drum Mount the photosensitive drum by reversing the steps used to remove it however be sure not to soil or scratche the drum and not to trap the cable of the drum heater 7 2 4 Setting the DIP Switch for the Drum Heater Control PCB 1 Remove the drum heater assembly See p 4 ...

Page 276: ...it 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the developing assembly See p 4 73P 3 Remove the hopper assembly See p 4 78P 4 Remove the primary charging cooling fan See p 7 36P 5 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly and place the drum protective sheet 1 on the registration roller assembly 6 Disconnect the four connectors 2 and remove the two mounting screws 3 F04 703 01 2 3 3 1 ...

Page 277: ... 6 in the drum rotat ing tool to remove the drum fixing screw If the drum is let to rotate coun terclockwise the cleaning blade will not come into contact with the drum correctly leading to cleaning faults Be sure to fix the drum in place first before removing the drum fixing screw to avoid the problem F04 703 02 REF If the hopper assembly is re leased but not removed be sure to open the right upp...

Page 278: ...ollowing in mind 1 On the left rail place the process rail along the guide plate 1 at the front rear of the rail See p 7 30P On the right rail 2 place the process unit on the L shaped stay F04 703 05 2 After sliding the process unit into the machine match the slot in the drum shaft and the slot in the drum using the drum rotating tool 3 Then insert the drum fixing tool 4 and fit the mount ing scre...

Page 279: ...ontrol PCB at the same time 1 Open the front cover and slide out the hopper unit 2 Remove the developing assembly and the primary charging cooling fan See p 7 36P 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and re move the screw 2 then detach the po tential sensor assembly 3 F04 704 01 4 Remove the three screws 4 and detach the front door switch cover 5 F04 704 02 5 Free the cable 6 from the cable guide 6 Remove...

Page 280: ...UNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4 58 P 7 Remove the two screws 9 and detach the potential control PCB together with the mounting base 10 F04 704 04 8 Remove the four screws 11 and three connectors 12 and detach the poten tial control PCB 13 F04 704 05 9 10 11 13 12 ...

Page 281: ...lace the potential control PCB 3 Connect the connector of the potential sensor to the connector of the machine 4 Fit the potential checking electrode FY9 3012 2 to the potential sensor 1 F04 704 06 When fitting the checking elec trode to the potential sensor 1 be sure that the magnet of the checking electrode does not come into contact with the po tential sensor cover 5 Connect the clip 3 of the c...

Page 282: ...ch 8 Execute the following in service mode COPIER FUNCTION DPC OFST 9 Record the setting of OFST on the service label 10 Start service mode and set 1 to the following to enable potential control COPIER OPTION BODY PO CNT 11 Check to make sure that the data lamp in the control panel is off then turn off the main power switch 12 Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet 13 Remove the checking ...

Page 283: ...2 Loosen the mounting screw 1 and slide up the fixing member 2 to secure the fixing member in place 3 Disconnect the connector 3 and re move the primary charging assembly 4 F04 705 01 If you have replaced the primary charging wire or the primary charging assembly be sure to execute the following in service mode to clean the wire COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING WIRE CLN Further be user to use a strengthen...

Page 284: ... the front cover and slide out the hopper assembly 2 Remove the mounting screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then de tach the pre transfer assembly 3 F04 706 01 When you have mounted the pre transfer charging assembly be sure to execute wire clean ing in user mode If the sur face temperature of the fixing upper roller is 100 C or lower you need not execute this as the wire will be cleaned autom...

Page 285: ...harging Assembly 1 Open the front cover and slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the two removing screws 1 and detach the feeder right front cover 2 F04 707 01 3 Remove the mounting screw 3 and detach the fixing guide 4 F04 707 02 4 Disconnect the connector 5 and slide out the transfer separation charging as sembly 6 to the front then detach it by pulling it up at an angle F04 707 03 1 2 1 3...

Page 286: ...while keeping the following in mind 1 Make sure that the four protrusions 1 on the transfer separation charging as sembly are correctly fitted into the cut offs 2 in the fixing feeding unit F04 707 04 2 Make sure that the leaf spring 3 of the fixing feeding unit comes in contact with the frame of the transfer separation charging assembly slide from the front F04 707 05 F04 707 06 3 Mount the fixin...

Page 287: ...he following in service mode to clean the wire COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING WIRE CLN If you have replaced the separation charging wire or the separation charging assembly be sure to execute wire cleaning in user mode If the surface temperature of the fixing upper roller is 100 C or lower you need not execute this mode as the wire will be cleaned automatically Further be sure to use a strengthened poli...

Page 288: ...arging assembly and the transfer charging assembly 7 8 2 Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Primary Charging Assembly 1 Pick the wire cleaner and disengage the hook with a flat blade screwdriver F04 708 01 7 8 3 Routing the Charging Wire All charging wires except the grid wire are routed more or less in the same way the fol lowing cites the primary charging assembly 1 Remove the shielding plate left...

Page 289: ... about 2 mm REF To form a loop wind the charg ing wire around a hex key once and turn the hex key three to four times then twist the charg ing wire 4 Cut the end excess of the twisted charging wire 5 Hook the loop on the stud F04 708 03 6 At the rear hook the charging wire on the charging wire positioner then hook the charging wire tension spring on the charging wire where indicated to F04 708 04 ...

Page 290: ... F04 708 05 Make sure of the following The charging wire must not be bent or twisted The charging wire must be fitted in the V groove of the charging wire positioner F04 708 06 9 Attach a cushoin in front of the charg ing wire This does not apply to the primary charging assembly 10 Mount the shielding plate left right For other charging assemblies mount the two lids 11 Mount the wire cleaner At th...

Page 291: ...temporarily 4 Free a length of about 5 cm of charging wire from the charging wire reel 0 1 mm in diameter and form a loop at its end with a diameter of about 2 mm F04 708 08 REF To form a loop wind the charg ing wire around a hex key once and turn the hex key three to four times then twist the charg ing wire 5 Cut the twisted charging wire excess with nippers 6 Hook the loop on stud A 7 After rout...

Page 292: ...e is even Be sure to pay attention to avoid defor mation slack of the charging assembly as by tightening the mounting screw found on the front of the left right shielding plate early 10 Tighten the mounting screws loosened in steps 1 and 2 11 Wipe the grid wire with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 1 Check to make sure that the grid wire is free of bending and twisting 2 Be sure that the run...

Page 293: ...i mary charging wire and the transfer charging wire may be adjusted by turning the screw found at the back of the charg ing assembly a single turn changes the position of the charging wire by about 0 7 mm Charging assembly Height of charging wire Tolerance Primary Pre transfer 2mm Transfer Separation A B C D 7 5 1 5 0 mm 9 5 0 5mm 14 9 0 5mm 1mm 2mm 7 5 1 5 0 mm 10 06 0 3 mm No height adjusting me...

Page 294: ...EM 4 72 P 7 8 6 Cleaning the Primary Anti Stray Sheet 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the developing assembly 3 Remove the hopper assembly 4 Remove the process unit See p 4 54P 5 Remove the two screws 1 and remove the potential sensor rail stay 2 F04 708 10 6 Clean the primary anti stray sheet 3 F04 708 11 1 2 1 3 ...

Page 295: ...ure not to mount the developing as sembly locking assembly The toner collecting in the path from the hopper to the developing as sembly can start to move astray because of the vibration occur ring during inspection or repair work 7 9 1 Removing the Developing Assembly from the Machine 1 Open the right upper cover and remove the mounting screw then detach the door stopper tape 2 Remove the mounting...

Page 296: ...ws 1 and detach the developing assembly cover 2 F04 709 03 3 Place a newspaper on the floor or a desk and pour out the toner onto the newspaper from the developing assem bly 4 Remove the two mounting screws 3 and detach the blade unit 4 together with its mounting base F04 709 04 The blade must be mounted with a high accuracy Do not remove it on its own in the field i e be sure to remove it intact ...

Page 297: ...on the developing cylinder first to pro tect the developing cylinder 7 9 4 Removing the Developing Cylinder Magnetic Seal 1 Remove the developing assembly from the machine 2 Remove the blade unit 3 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the gear unit 2 together with the gear F04 709 05 When removing the gear unit be sure to take care as the gear attached to the screw will be come free 4 Remov...

Page 298: ...ON SYSTEM 4 76 P 5 Remove the two mounting screws 7 and detach the electrode plate 8 F04 709 07 6 Remove the mounting screw 9 and detach the magnetic positioning plate 10 F04 709 08 7 Remove the grip ring 11 mounted to the cylinder shaft at the front and de tach the push on roll 12 F04 709 09 8 7 10 9 11 12 ...

Page 299: ...g plate F04 709 10 9 Remove the bearing 15 at the front and the rear and detach the developing cylinder 16 F04 709 11 Do not leave fingerprints or oils on the surface of the developing cylinder Otherwise dry wipe it with lint free paper Do not use solvent 7 9 5 Cleaning the Developing Anti Stray Sheet 1 Remove the developing assembly and clean the developing anti stray sheet 1 F04 709 12 13 14 13 ...

Page 300: ... Assembly 7 10 1 Removing the Hopper Assembly from the Machine 1 Slide out the hopper assembly to the front See p 3 11P 2 Remove the mounting screw 1 and detach the hopper assembly 2 F04 710 01 The screw 1 is used to prevent the hopper assembly 2 from dropping when removing it be sure to support the hoper assem bly with your hand 1 2 ...

Page 301: ... Blade 1 Slide out the process unit from the ma chine See p 4 54P 2 Remove the primary charging assembly 3 Disconnect the connector 1 of the AC line of the drum heater 4 Remove the four mounting screws 2 and detach the cleaning blade assembly 3 F04 711 02 5 Remove the E ring 4 from under the cleaning blade assembly and detach the pressure spring 5 F04 711 03 Cleaning blade Separation claw 1 2 3 5 ...

Page 302: ...he pre exposure LED assembly 8 F04 711 04 7 Loosen the five mounting screws 9 and detach the blade support plate from the cleaning blade F04 711 05 7 11 3 Mounting the Cleaning Blade When mounting the cleaning blade be sure that the side with the marking 1 will be the face 1 Push in the cleaning blade 2 until it butts slightly again the rear F04 711 06 No gap Blade retaining plate 2 1 9 6 7 8 ...

Page 303: ...felt 3 Turn the screws tightened lightly in step 2 about 20 to 30 in the order indi cated tightening them fully F04 711 07 After mounting the cleaning blade check to make sure that the edge of the blade is not ap preciably bent Further be sure to clean the groove in the blade support plate before mounting the blade as toner or the like in the groove can start to bend the blade order of tightening ...

Page 304: ... roller 2 toward the rear and then make sure that the inner end of the side seal is within the area 3 of the washer When replacing the side seal 1 at the rear push the magnet roller 2 toward the front and then make sure that the inner end of the side seal is within the area 3 of the washer 2 The bottom end of each side seal 1 must be 0 to 0 5 mm from the corner of the cleaner hosing i e point of r...

Page 305: ...en magnet roller and toner guide roller using tweezers or the like 3 Remove the toner from the surface of the magnet roller Roll paper into a U to scoop it up F04 711 09 F04 711 10 4 Turn the magnet roller clockwise viewing from the front 5 Repeat steps 3 through 5 until the area from which toner was removed in step 3 is once again coated with an even layer of toner 4 to 8mm A Toner guide roller S...

Page 306: ... Claw Separation Claw Drive Assembly 7 12 1 Removing from the Drum Unit 1 Remove the process unit from the ma chine See p 4 54P F04 712 01 1 Take care not to break the separation claw 2 Take care not to damage the photosensitive drum 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the cover 2 3 Remove the two screws 3 and detach the claw holder 4 2 1 4 3 ...

Page 308: ...d copying Related user mode Related mechanical adjustment T05 101 01 1500 sheets each of 80 g m2 550 sheets each of 80 m2 50 sheets 80 g m2 By service person By user By user By service person By user Center Paper deck right left Front cassette 3 4 Manual feed tray Paper deck left right Front cassette 3 Front cassette 4 100 V model Front cassette 4 120 230 V model Manual feed tray Through path Cass...

Page 309: ...n roller Pickup vertical path 1 roller Pickup vertical path 2 roller Pickup vertical path 3 roller Pickup vertical path 4 roller Duplexing assembly outlet roller Pull out roller Duplexing feed right roller Reversal roller Internal delivery roller External delivery roller Delivery auxiliary roller Registration roller Multifeeder pull out roller PS31 PS34 Fixing upper roller Duplexing feed left roll...

Page 310: ...k retry sensor Left deck retry sensor Cassette 3 retry sensor Cassette 4 retry sensor Manual feed paper sensor Vertical path 1 paper sensor Vertical path 2 paper sensor Vertical path 3 paper sensor Vertical path 4 paper sensor Laser write start sensor Registration paper sensor Duplexing pre registration sensor Duplexing horizontal registration sensor Right deck feed paper sensor Left deck feed pap...

Page 311: ...egistration roller clutch drive signal RGCD J104 B Vertical path duplexing motor drive signal J115 B13 Left deck pull out clutch signal LDCLD J107 A16 Left deck feed paper detection signal LDPFS J104A Left deck pickup motor J102 B6 Left deck pickup solenoid drive signal LDPUSD J115 11A Left deck retry signal LDRT J115 A5 Left deck lifter detection signal LDLTP J115 A8 Left deck paper detection sig...

Page 312: ...l VP2PD J104B Vertical path lower motor drive signal J104A Cassette 3 4 pickup motor drive signal J110 A17 Cassette 3 pickup solenoid drive signal C3PUSD Cassette 3 lifter detection signal C3LTP J110 A5 Cassette 3 paper detection signal C3PD J110 B14 Vertical path 4 paper detection signal VP4PD J110 B8 Cassette 4 retry signal C4RTD J110 B17 Cassette 4 pickup solenoid drive signal C4PUSD J110 B2 Ca...

Page 313: ... M24 The pickup motor M11 M12 M24 turns on and the pickup roller rotates to feed paper The pickup solenoid SL3 SL4 SL6 SL7 turns and the pickup roller moves away from the paper The feed roller and the separation roller make sure that only one sheet of paper is moved farther to the paper path The sheet of paper moves through the vertical path assembly and reaches the registration roller The pickup ...

Page 314: ...mmand received 1st sheet pickup 2nd sheet pickup Main motor M2 INTR PRINT LSTR STBY STBY 1 Rests to arch against the registration roller Right deck pickup solenoid SL6 Right deck pickup motor M11 Right deck retry sensor PS19 Vertical path duplexing feeding motor M25 Pre registration motor M17 Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor PS24 Laser write start sensor PS28 Registration paper sensor PS29 Regi...

Page 315: ...sensor PS25 Vertical path duplexing feeding motor M25 Pre registration motor M17 Vertical path 1 paper sensor PS24 Vertical path lower motor M27 Vertical path upper motor M26 Start key ON or PRINT command received 1st sheet pickup 2nd sheet pickup Laser write start sensor PS28 Registration paper sensor PS29 Registration roller clutch CL2 Main motor M2 INTR PRINT LSTR STBY STBY 1 Rests to arch agai...

Page 316: ... retry operation If a delay is detected once again after a retry the machine will indicate the Jam message in its control panel The following is the sequence of retry operations F05 201 06 F05 201 05 SL M Retry sensor Pickup motor Pickup roller Pickup roller DOWN solenoid Pickup roller Retry sensor 1 Vertical path sensor Retry started Delay detected 1 Period of detection determined by the clock pu...

Page 317: ...1 CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 10 P The following is used to switch the temperature control mechanism for the fixing heater to use thick paper sequence when a specific source is selected COPIER OPTION CST C1 DWSW C1 front deck right COPIER OPTION CST C2 DWSW C2 front deck left ...

Page 318: ...s own weight Cassette open closed detection Lifter position detection Paper detection Paper level de tection Lifter UP lim iter Drive motor Right deck Right deck open closed sensor PS5 Right deck lifter sensor PS6 Right deck pa per sensor PS7 Right deck pa per level upper sensor PS47 Right deck pa per level lower sensor PS48 Right deck limit sensor PS8 Right deck lifter motor M5 Left deck Left dec...

Page 319: ...the cassette Deck F05 202 02 F05 202 01 Paper sensor Feed rollers Separation rollers Lifter Paper Deck open closed sensor Pickup roller Pickup roller retry sensor Lifter position lever Limit sensor Lifter sensor Paper detecting lever Paper sensor Feed rollers Separation roller Lifter Lifter sensor Cassette open closed sensor Paper Pickup roller Pickup roller retry sensor Cassette ...

Page 320: ... limiter the limit signal will be sent to the DC controller PCB to cut the drive signal thereby stopping the lifter motor The following is a block diagram of the control circuit F05 202 03 M5 Motor driver PCB CPU Right deck limit sensor PS8 DC controller PCB Motor drive signal 5 6 B8 J112 J2105 Right deck lifter limit signal RDEL 1 J2108 13 J105 Right deck lifter sensor PS6 Right deck lifter detec...

Page 321: ...sensor Paper Is Present Paper Is Absent F05 202 04 F05 202 05 2 2 4 Detecting the Level of Paper a Outline The machine indicates the level of paper in the deck or the cassette on the control panel in four levels including absence Paper sensor Paper detecting lever Paper Lifter Paper sensor Paper detecting lever Lifter F05 202 06 T05 202 02 3 bars 2 bars 1 bar No bar 100 to about 50 of capacity 50 ...

Page 322: ...the sensors on off The absence of paper is detected by an exclusive sensor See 2 2 3 Detecting the Pres ence Absence of Paper F05 202 07 Right deck Left deck 1 2 1 2 Paper level Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor PS47 PS48 PS7 PS49 PS50 PS11 100 to about 50 ON ON ON ON ON ON about 50 to about 10 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON about 10 or less OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON absent OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Paper ...

Page 323: ...able resistor operating in conjunction with the movement of the lifter drive shaft F05 202 08 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C3 LVOL when 50 sheets exist in the cassette 3 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C3 HVOL when 275 sheets exist in the cassette 3 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C4 LVOL when 50 sheets exist in the cassette 4 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C4 HVOL when 275 sheets exist in the cassette 4 Paper level high Paper level...

Page 324: ... is slid into the cassette holder the paper size sensor is activated by the boss on the cassette enabling the identification of paper width and length Based on the width and the length the DC controller identifies the size of the paper and sends the result to the controller unit and the reader unit The boss used to press the paper size sensor operates in conjunction with the guide plate inside the...

Page 325: ...r size configuration of the cassette 4 can be configured as follows 1 Changing the position of the paper size guide plate inside the cassette 2 Registering the new paper size in service mode COPIER OPTION CST P SZ C4 cassette 4 paper size Cassette 3 Cassette 4 1 Paper length detection SV2 2 photointerrupters SV1 2 photointerrupters Paper width detection SVR4 SVR5 Paper width detecting VR Paper len...

Page 326: ...per size positioning holes given markings from A through M as shown below These markings can help determine whether the correct paper width is selected as when the user reports skew movement of paper Note that this information is not disclosed to the user Marking Paper name Remarks A STMT R B A5 R C B5 R D KLGL R E GLTR R F G LGL U3 G A4 R H LGL LTR R I FLSC U2 J B4 B5 K G LTR U1 L 279 4 431 8mm U...

Page 327: ...G LTR K LGL FOOLSCAP OFFICIO E OFFI A OFFI M OFI G LGL FOLIO AUS FLS LTR A LTR T05 203 03 PS102 PS104 SZ 2 0 2 3 4 Paper Sizes The DC controller PCB identifies the size of paper based on inputs of paper width and length as shown in the following table and sends the result of identification to the controller unit The paper sizes in the following table are selected from specific groups The asterisk ...

Page 328: ...to adjust the paper width basic value for STMTR in the cassette 3 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C3 A4R Used to adjust the paper width basic value for A4R in the cassette 3 COPIER CST ADJ C4 STMTR Used to adjust the paper width basic value for STMTR in the cassette 4 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C4 A4R Used to adjust the paper width basic value for A4 in the cassette 4 COPIER OPTION BODY C1 DWSW Used to switch th...

Page 329: ...xico Officio Notation A3 A4R A4 A5 A5R B4 B5R B5 11 17 LTRR LTR STMT STMTR LGL K LGL K LGLR FLSC A FLS OFI E OFI B OFI A LTR A LTRR G LTR G LTRR A LGL G LGL FOLI A OFI M OFI Size vertical x horizontal mm 297 1 420 1 210 1 297 1 297 1 210 1 210 1 148 5 1 148 5 1 210 1 257 1 364 1 182 1 257 1 257 1 182 1 279 1 432 1 216 1 279 1 279 1 216 1 216 1 139 5 1 139 5 1 216 1 216 1 356 1 265 1 190 1 190 1 26...

Page 330: ...lding tray This condition allows the gear of the feed roller to receive the drive of the main motor so that the feed roller makes a single rotation to move paper The paper is moved as far as the registration roller by the work of the manual feed pull off roller while the feed roller rotates F05 204 01 M1 CL2 CL3 SL2 Registration roller clutch drive signal RGCD J106 A6 Manual feed pickup clutch dri...

Page 331: ... of paper is for control of the laser and the length of paper is detected when the manual feed tray is used with reference to the period of time during which the pre registration paper sensor PS23 remains on The paper width basic value must always be entered newly whenever the variable resistor has been replaced F05 204 02 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF A4R Used to enter the paper width basic value for ...

Page 332: ...on Clutch 3 1 Outline The registration clutch is controlled so that print paper and the image on the drum match at a specific point and the timing at which it is turned on may be adjusted in service mode ADJUST FEED ADJ REGIST 3 2 Control System F05 302 01 CL2 J106 A6 Registration rollers Main motor Registration drive signal RGCD DC controller PCB M2 ...

Page 333: ...S37 PS35PS4 PS46 Reversing flapper Delivery flapper PS29 M14 SL8 SL5 Reversing flapper solenoid drive signal RVFSD2 J107 B11 Delivery assembly jam detection signal DSJAM J106 B2 Delivery flapper solenoid drive signal RIVFS D1 J106 A14 Internal delivery sensor drive signal IDS J106 B1 Claw jam detection signal CJAM J106 B19 Reversal detection signal 2 RVS2 J107 B16 Registration paper detection sign...

Page 334: ...g flapper solenoid drive signal RVFSD2 J107 B15 Reversal detection signal 1 RVS1 J107B Reversal motor drive signal J107 B16 Reversal detection signal 2 RVS2 J107A Duplexing feeding left motor drive signal J107 B12 Duplexing horizontal registration signal DSRGPD J107 B14 Duplexing feeding right motor drive signal DPDS J107A Duplexing feeding right motor drive signal J107 B13 Duplexing pre registrat...

Page 335: ...move the paper to the duplexing reversing assembly When the paper moves past the reversal sensor 2 PS38 and reaches a specific point the reversal motor M19 stops to rotate holding the paper in wait in the reversing assembly When the reversal motor M14 starts to rotate once again in reverse this time the paper in the reversing assembly is moved to the duplexing wait position by the work of the dupl...

Page 336: ...k of 2nd sheet Pickup motor M2 Claw jam sensor PS4 Delivery flapper solenoid SL5 Reversal motor M14 Duplexing feed left motor M29 Duplexing feed right motor M18 Vertical path duplexing feed motor M25 Duplexing pre registration sensor PS30 Duplexing paper sensor PS34 Reversal sensor 1 S37 Reversal sensor 2 PS38 Reversal flapper solenoid SL8 Internal delivery sensor PS35 yyyy yyyy 1 1 stops to arch ...

Page 337: ...of the delivery flapper and the reversing flapper The machine is capable of reordering page images in its memory eliminating the need to print according to the order of originals as a result it need not hold paper as long as other models would speeding up double sided printing As many as two sheets of paper may exist between the registration sensor and the duplexing paper sensor at a time COPIER A...

Page 338: ...path operation when printing one set of duplexing prints of 10 originals 1 The 1st sheet is picked from the deck 2 The 1st side is printed on the 1st sheet The 2nd sheet is picked up 4 The 1st sheet is moved to the duplexing feeding assembly 3 The 3rd side is printed on the 2nd sheet The 1st sheet is moved to the reversing assembly The 3rd sheet is picked up F05 403 01 1 3 1 3 1 ...

Page 339: ...ed to the reversing assembly The 5th side is printed on the 3rd sheet 6 The 1st sheet is repicked from duplexing wait position The 2nd sheet is moved to the duplexing feeding assembly 8 The 7th side is printed on the 4th sheet and the 1st sheet is delivered 7 The 2nd side is printed on the 1st sheet The 2nd sheet is moved to duplexing wait position The 4th sheet is picked up 5 3 1 1 5 3 5 3 1 2 7 ...

Page 340: ...n the 2nd sheet and the 3rd sheet is held in wait in duplexing wait position The 5th sheet is picked up 10 The 2nd sheet is delivered The 9th side is printed on the 5th sheet 12 The 3rd sheet is delivered 11 The 6th side is printed on the 3rd sheet The 4th sheet is held in wait in duplexing wait position 5 2 1 7 4 3 2 1 4 3 9 5 7 6 5 9 7 4 3 2 1 6 5 7 4 3 2 1 9 ...

Page 341: ...V 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 34 P 13 The 8th side is printed on the 4th sheet 14 The 4th sheet is delivered and the 10th side is printed on the 5th side 15 The 5th sheet is delivered 8 7 9 4 3 6 5 2 1 8 9 7 4 3 6 5 2 1 10 9 6 5 8 7 2 1 4 3 F05 403 04 ...

Page 342: ...ng horizontal registration sensor PS31 Detection started when the duplexing paper sensor PS34 turns on Drive from the duplexing horizontal registration motor M16 Position measured with reference to pulses from the duplexing horizontal registration motor 1 pulse 0 16 mm approx Related service mode COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ REFE T05 404 01 F05 404 01 M16 PS31 Home position Detection start position ...

Page 343: ...n of paper obtained based on the position of the slide guide of the manual feed tray and the size of the cassette being used when the registration sensor turns on The detection of paper is done with reference to the start position and the discrepancy be tween the start position and the actual position of the paper is identified with reference to the number of pulses a signal pulse being about 0 16...

Page 344: ...4 01 See F05 201 01 Error detection Motor error Jam Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Same as above Error code indi cation E051 Motor error Jam Same as above Motor driver M12 A7 A8 J104 4 5 6 3 2 1 J2104 DC controller PCB CPU IC5025 A A B B 24V 24V A9 A10 A14 A10 A13 J2101 A12 A9 A11 24V 5 Controlling the Pickup Assembly 5 1 Pickup As...

Page 345: ...ly F05 601 01 2 The internal delivery sensor PS35 turns on and the paper is moved over a specific distance then the reversal mo tor M14 turns on to stop the paper when its trailing edge turns on the re versal sensor 1 PS37 F05 601 02 Method of delivery Face up Face down Mode of operation Prints multiple copies of a single original In manual feed mode when a default size is selected while the selec...

Page 346: ...s past the reversing roller The fixing mo tor M19 rotates and the paper is de livered by the work of the external de livery roller F05 601 04 PS37 PS46 M14 Reversing flapper Point of reversal PS37 PS36 M19 M14 Reversing flapper External delivery roller Point of reversal PS37 COPIER OPTION BODY TPR DECL switching delivery path to improve stacking for delivering thick paper in face down mode 0 norma...

Page 347: ...C driver PCB with AC power The cassette heater switch SW4 serves to supply power to the heater through the AC line or to deprive it of power If the environment switch SW3 is off the heater will not be supplied with power through the AC line even if the cassette heater switch SW4 remains on H4 RL1 AC driver PCB Cassette heater SW1 Main power switch SW3 Environment switch DC power supply PCB 2 1 J40...

Page 348: ...e heater switch SW4 Cassette heater H4 OFF OFF Standby front cover open During printing OFF OFF In power save mode ON ON OFF OFF Main power switch SW1 T05 700 02 T05 700 01 The cassette heater H4 used for the 230V model operates as follows assuming that the environment switch SW3 remains on ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF Cassette heater switch SW4 Cassette heater H4 OFF OFF Standby front cover open Dur...

Page 349: ...ON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 5 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 42 P 8 Detecting Jams 8 1 Outline 8 1 1 Arrangement of Jam Sensors F05 801 01 PS36 PS38 PS37 PS33 PS20 PS25 PS24 PS19 PS35 PS29 PS32 PS21 PS26 PS22 PS27 PS30 PS4 PS46 PS31PS34 PS28 ...

Page 350: ...r sensor PS26 Vertical path 4 paper sensor PS27 Laser write start sensor PS28 Registration paper sensor PS29 Claw jam sensor PS4 Internal delivery sensor PS35 External delivery sensor PS36 Reversal sensor 1 PS37 Reversal sensor 2 PS38 Duplexing paper sensor PS34 Duplexing pre registration sensor PS30 Delivery assembly jam sensor PS46 Delay jam Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes...

Page 351: ...in a specific period of time af ter the motor turns on F05 802 01 T05 802 01 Start key ON or PRINT set INTR PRINT Motor N 1 Jam check Sensor N 1 Normal Error 1 1 specific feed period Pickup assembly Right deck Left deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Motor N 1 Right deck pickup motor M11 Left deck pickup motor M24 Cassette 3 4 pickup motor M12 Cassette 3 4 pickup motor M12 DelSzzay sensor N Right deck retr...

Page 352: ... Vertical path 4 paper sensor PS27 Laser write start sensor PS28 Registration paper sensor PS29 Internal delivery sensor PS35 External delivery sensor PS36 External delivery sensor PS36 Reversal sensor 1 PS37 Reversal sensor 2 PS38 Duplexing paper sensor PS34 Duplexing pre registration sensor PS30 F05 802 02 Start key ON or PRINT set INTR PRINT Sensor N 1 Jam check Sensor N Normal Error 1 1 1 spec...

Page 353: ...r sensor Laser write start sensor Registration paper sensor Claw jam sensor Internal delivery sensor External delivery sensor Reversal sensor 1 Reversal sensor 2 Duplexing paper sensor Duplexing pre registration sensor T05 802 03 b Stationary Jam at Power On A stationary jam at power on is identified in reference to the presence absence of paper over a specific sensor about 1 sec after the control...

Page 354: ...hine keeps a record of jams that occur inside it and allows a check in service mode COPIER DISPALY JAM Use it to display jam data COPIER FUNCTION JAM HIST Use it to clear the jam history The machine remembers the following in the event of a jam and will resume operation using the data after removal of the jam Remaining number of copies Copying mode ...

Page 355: ... indicated the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it 3 The screws must be identified by type length diameter and location 4 The mounting screw of the grounding wire and the varistors is equipped with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity They must not be left out when fitting the screws 5 As a rule the machine must not be operated with any of its parts r...

Page 356: ... 9 1 Manual Feed Tray Assembly 9 1 1 Removing the Right Upper Cover 1 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the cover 2 F05 901 01 2 Disconnect the connector 3 and de tach the right upper cover 4 F05 901 02 9 1 2 Opening of the Right Upper Cover 1 Open the right upper cover and remove the mounting screw 1 F05 901 03 2 1 3 4 1 ...

Page 357: ...etach the manual feed pull out roller unit F05 901 04 9 1 4 Removing the Feeding Roller 1 Open the right upper cover See p 5 49P 2 Remove the manual feed pull out roller unit See p 5 50P 3 Remove the stop print 1 and detach the pickup roller 2 F05 901 05 9 1 5 Removing the Separation Roller 1 Remove the manual feed pull out roller unit see p 5 50P 2 Remove the two stop rings 1 left right and remov...

Page 358: ... the right upper cover 2 Remove the upper guide 1 3 If double feeding or pickup failure oc curs during pickup adjust the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller F05 901 08 If double feeding occurs remove the mounting screw 2 and shift down the mounting base 3 then fix it in hole A using a mounting screw 2 If pickup failure occurs remove the mounting screw 2 and shift the mounting ...

Page 359: ...ng the Manual feed Tray Paper Sensor 1 Open the right upper cover See p 5 49P 2 Remove the mounting screw 1 and detach the cover 2 F05 901 10 3 Remove the mounting screw 3 and detach the sensor unit 4 F05 901 11 4 Free the harness 5 from the harness guide 6 and disconnect the connector 7 5 Remove the sensor 8 F05 901 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 360: ...iming belt 2 onto the pulley 3 F05 901 13 9 1 9 Removing the Manual Feed Pull Out Roller 1 Open the right upper cover See p 5 49P 2 Remove the manual feed pull out roller unit See p 5 50P 3 Remove the two E rings 1 left right 4 Remove the stopper 2 two gears 3 and two bushings 4 5 Remove the two E rings 5 and two bushings 6 then detach the manual feed pull out roller When removing the stopper 2 an...

Page 361: ...ssembly without re moving the deck will cause the lifter to get trapped not holding the pickup assembly from slid ing out 3 Remove the mounting screw 1 and detach the connector cover 2 then disconnect the connector 3 4 Remove the three mounting screws 4 and detach the pickup assembly 5 F05 902 01 9 2 2 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Assembly 1 Slide out the left right deck 2 Remove the two stoppers...

Page 362: ...pporting the pickup as sembly otherwise the pickup assembly could drop when the fixing plate is removed F05 902 04 9 2 3 Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup Assembly Use the steps used to remove the right deck pickup assembly 9 2 4 Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup Assembly Use the steps used to remove the right deck pickup assembly 9 2 5 Removing the Pickup Roller 1 Remove the pickup assembly from the ma...

Page 363: ...kup roller of the rear of the machine is silver colored When mounting the pickup roller 4 to the pickup assembly be sure that the marking 5 on the color silver col ored is toward the rear of the machine F05 902 07 9 2 6 Removing the Feeding Roller 1 Remove the pickup assembly form the machine 2 Remove the screw 2 and detach the feeding roller cover 1 For the left deck pickup assembly skip this ste...

Page 364: ...y be sure that the belt pulley 2 is at the front of the machine Check to make sure that the protrusion in the roller plate and the roller are engaged securely F05 902 09 9 2 8 Removing the Separation Roller 1 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the feed guide plate 2 then detach the open close guide 3 Skip this step for the left deck pickup assembly F05 902 10 2 Remove the two mounting scr...

Page 365: ...m the separation roller shaft support F05 902 12 The urethane sponge used in the part is pink at the beginning and changes to yellow over time accelerated if exposed to light it may appear to change to or ange before turning pink This is a common characteristic of urethane sponge and does not indicate physical deterioration performance In addition note that the part is not classified by color F05 ...

Page 366: ...e occurs change the spring in the direction of arrow A 1 Feeding roller 2 Separation roller 3 Pressure lever 4 Pressure spring F05 902 14 9 2 10 Orientation of the Separation Roller Keep the following in mind when replac ing the separation roller Mounting the separation roller in the wrong orientation will lead to interference against crimping washer Make sure it is mounted in the correct orienta ...

Page 367: ... for the Front Deck 1 Loosen the four screws 2 and the two fixing screws 3 on the deck front cover 1 F05 902 16 2 Move the cassette guide assembly front 4 to the front or the rear to make adjustments F05 902 17 9 2 12 Adjusting the Registration for the Cassette 3 4 1 Loosen the two fixing screws 1 found on the left and right of the cassette F05 902 18 1 2 2 3 2 3 4 1 ...

Page 368: ...tor M20 M21 of the Cassette 3 4 1 Slide out the right deck and the cassette 3 4 2 Take out the cassette right cover See 9 3 2 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2 3 Remove the two fixing screws 1 of the lifter motor M20 M21 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the lifter motor 3 F05 902 20 9 2 14 Adjusting the Position of the Lifter Motor M20 M21 of the Cassette 3 cassette 4 1 Remove the guid...

Page 369: ...otor gear 6 from the right side of the ma chine then check also to make sure that the lifter drive gear is fully away from the lifter gear when the release button 7 of the cassette 3 cassette 4 is pressed halfway The expression pressing the release button halfway means the following The separation roller moves down The cassette is about to slide out F05 902 23 5 If the filter drive gear is not ful...

Page 370: ...lease button under the following conditions and turn on the machine the cassette contains no paper the cassette contains about 550 sheets of paper 9 2 15 Adjusting the Position of the Cassette 3 4 Pickup Solenoid SL3 4 Adjust the position of the solenoid using the two screws 3 so that the distance from the bottom of the pickup assembly to section A of the roller arm is 36 0 5 mm when 1 and 2 are o...

Page 371: ... following from the front E ring 1 1 pc bearing 2 1 pc 3 Remove the following from the rear E ring 3 1 pc bushing 4 2 pc roller base 5 blue gear 6 parallel pin 7 F05 903 01 4 Remove the guide plate 8 and detach the vertical path roller 1 9 F05 903 02 9 3 2 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2 1 Slide out the right deck and the cassette 3 4 2 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the cassette holder ...

Page 372: ...e roller shaft and move the bearing 7 toward the inside then detach the vertical path roller 2 8 F05 903 05 9 3 3 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 3 4 1 Remove the cassette pickup assembly 2 Remove the following from the front E ring 1 1 pc spacer 2 1 pc bearing 3 1 pc 3 Remove the following from the rear E ring 4 3 pc bushing 5 2 pc roller mount 6 blue gear 7 parallel pin 8 4 Remove the vertical...

Page 373: ...e two sems screws 1 and detach the stopper 2 3 Disconnect the connector 3 and re move the registration clutch 4 F05 904 01 9 4 2 Removing the Registration Roller 1 Remove the fixing feeding unit from the machine 2 Remove the feeding right cover of the fixing feeding unit See p 4 63P 3 Remove the transfer separation charging assembly 4 Remove the registration clutch 5 Remove the two mounting screws...

Page 374: ... FEEDING SYSTEM 5 67 P 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 6 Remove the following from the back spring 3 E ring 4 spacer 5 bearing 6 stopper 7 F05 904 03 7 Remove the following from the front screw 8 spring 9 E ring 10 spacer 11 bearing 12 stopper 13 break 14 8 Remove the registration roller 15 F05 904 04 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 375: ...er and feeing left cover 3 Disconnect the two connectors 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the harness guide 3 F05 905 01 4 Remove the two mounting screws 4 and detach the fixing feeding unit re leasing lever support 5 F05 905 02 5 Remove the E ring 6 bearing 7 and two screws 8 from the front F05 905 03 6 Remove the E ring 9 pulley 10 pin 11 three screws 12 E ring 13 and bearing 14 then detach ...

Page 376: ...Feeding Unit Releasing Lever Switch 1 Slide the fixing feeding unit out of the machine 2 Remove the feeding right cover and the feeding left cover 3 Disconnect the two connectors 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the harness guide 3 F05 905 06 4 Remove the two mounting screws 4 and detach the fixing feeding unit re leasing lever support 5 F05 905 07 5 Remove the two mounting screws 6 and detach...

Page 377: ...not place the duplex unit where it may suffer dam age F05 906 01 9 6 2 Removing the Reversing Flapper Solenoid 1 Remove the duplex unit from the ma chine 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 3 from the guide 2 3 Remove the two mounting screws 4 and detach the reversing flapper sole noid 5 The steps of installation refer to 9 6 17 Mounting the Reversing Flapper solenoid F05 906 02 9 6 ...

Page 378: ...g screws 4 and detach the reversal motor 5 from the support plate F05 906 04 9 6 4 Mounting the Reversal Motor 1 While the spring 1 has most tension tighten the two mounting screws 2 temporarily F05 906 05 2 Mount the support plate 4 2 pc and the motor 5 using three mounting screws 3 then attach the timing belt 6 F05 906 06 4 4 5 1 1 2 2 3 3 6 4 5 ...

Page 379: ... 07 At the end be sure the timing belt has tension 9 6 5 Removing the Duplexing Feeding Left Motor 1 Remove the front cover of the duplex unit 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and re move the two screws 2 then detach the duplex feeding left motor 3 F05 906 08 9 6 6 Removing the Duplex Feeding Right Motor 1 Remove the front cover of the duplex unit 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and re move the two screw...

Page 380: ...n unit 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 2 from the harness guide 3 4 Remove the two mounting screws 4 and detach the horizontal registration motor 5 F05 906 10 9 6 8 Removing the Duplex Pre Registration Sensor 1 Slide the duplex unit out the machine 2 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the cover 2 F05 906 11 3 Remove the two mounting screws 3 and detach the sensor togethe...

Page 381: ... move the sensor 6 F05 906 13 9 6 9 Removing the Duplex Paper Sensor 1 Slide the duplex unit out of the duplex unit 2 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the cover 2 F05 906 14 3 Remove the two mounting screws 3 and detach the sensor together with its base 4 F05 906 15 4 Disconnect the connector 5 and re move the sensor 6 F05 906 16 5 6 2 1 3 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 382: ...lex unit out of the ma chine 2 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the sensor together with its base 2 F05 906 17 3 Disconnect the connector 3 and de tach the sensor 4 F05 906 18 9 6 11 Removing the Reversal Sensor 2 1 Slide the duplex unit out of the ma chine 2 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the sensor together with its base 2 F05 906 19 1 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 ...

Page 383: ...ect the connector 3 and re move the sensor 4 F05 906 20 9 6 12 Removing the Left Deck Feed Paper Sensor 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and re move the two mounting screws 2 from the bottom of the duplex unit then de tach the sensor together with its base 3 F05 906 21 2 Remove the left deck feed paper sensor 4 F05 906 22 3 4 2 2 3 1 4 ...

Page 384: ...ine 2 Remove the horizontal registration unit 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and re move the horizontal registration sensor 2 F05 906 23 9 6 14 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB 1 Slide the duplex driver out of the ma chine 2 Remove the front cover of the duplex driver 3 Disconnect all connectors from the du plex driver PCB 4 Remove the four mounting screws 1 and detach the duplex driver PCB 2 F05 906 ...

Page 385: ...urn over the duplex unit 4 Remove the mounting screw 1 from the front 5 Remove the mounting screw 2 and disconnect the connector 3 from the rear then detach the horizontal regis tration unit 4 F05 906 25 9 6 16 Removing the Duplex Feeding Fan 1 Slide out the duplex unit and detach the front cover of the duplex unit 2 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the f...

Page 386: ...h the duplex feeding fan 5 Be sure that the arrow indicat ing the direction of air is as in dicated when mounting the du plex feeldng fan F05 906 27 9 6 17 Mounting the Reversing Flapper Solenoid 1 Adjust the position of the solenoid us ing two screws 2 so that the drive le ver 1 is fully pushed when the sole noid turns on i e the plunger is drawn F05 906 28 5 4 1 2 ...

Page 388: ...uence 3 Ambient temperature sequence Web roller driven by solenoid and one way clutch 1 By thermistor temperature error 2 By thermal switch overheating 1 Control of fixing assembly inlet guide drive about 1 mm up down High if original is B5R or longer Low if original is shorter than B5R 2 Control of reciprocating movement of thermistor about 12 mm 3 Control of reciprocating movement of upper separ...

Page 389: ...e following components Cleaning web unit Cleaning web Main thermistor TH1 Sub thermistor TH2 Main heater H1 Thermal switch TP1 Fixing assembly inlet guide Fixing upper roller Fixing lower roller Lower separation claw Sub heater H2 Upper separation claw F06 101 01 Fixing upper roller Sub thermistor TH2 Main thermistor TH1 Thermal switch TP1 F06 101 02 ...

Page 390: ...ze paper B4 or larger turns on twice for the 1st sheet and then once for the 2nd and 3rd sheets repeats the sequence thereafter For small size paper smaller than B4 turns on once for the 1st and 2nd sheets and remains off for the 3rd sheet repeats the sequence thereafter Moves in reciprocating motions about 3 mm Moves up down about 1 8 mm T06 101 02 Component Fixing upper roller Fixing lower rolle...

Page 391: ...Sequence of Operations fixing system Wait indicator Red Red Green Fixing motor M3 Main heater H1 100V Sub heater H2 SLEEP WMUP WMUPR STBY INTR PSTBY PRINT LSTR STBY Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON Fixing tem perature 195 C 205 C 200 C 195 C 190 C 200 C Start key ON 210 C 120 230V Sub heater H2 F06 102 01 ...

Page 392: ...stem 1 Fixing roller drive 2 Cleaning web drive 3 Fixing assembly inlet guide drive 4 Thermistor reciprocating mechanism drive 5 Upper separation claw reciprocating mechanism M19 SL1 SL9 DC controller PCB J106B Drive signal Drive signal Drive signal J106B Fixing inlet guide drive solenoid Fixing drive motor Thermistor TH1 Upper separation claw Fixing web drive solenoid PS45 Fixing web length senso...

Page 393: ...of the fixing motor reaches a specific level 0 F06 202 01 E014 fixing motor speed error It is indicated when the drive lock signal is absent for 2 sec or more 2 sec after the fixing motor drive signal M19ON is generated DC controller PCB M19LD 2 GND 5V M19ON 1 M19 Fixing upper roller Fixing motor J106 A15 A16 A17 A18 24V DC power supply PCB GND J4005 1 2 2 2 Controlling the Drive of the Fixing Rol...

Page 394: ...2 3 Controlling the Drive of the Cleaning Web The cleaning web used to clean the fixing upper roller is advanced by the fixing web sole noid SL9 one way clutch The length of the cleaning web is detected by any of the following two ways 1 When the web detecting lever drops through the cut out it blocks the fixing web length sensor PS45 causing the message Web Running Out to appear in the con trol p...

Page 395: ...nal when 0 the fixing assembly inlet guide moves down 2 4 Controlling the Drive of the Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide The machine changes the height of the fixing assembly inlet guide to suit specific paper sizes thereby ensuring correct movement of paper The height is controlled by the fixing as sembly inlet solenoid operated by the following control system Fixing inlet guide solenoid SL1 DC control...

Page 396: ...he Reciprocating Mechanisms of the Ther mistor To prevent damage to the fixing upper roller by the main thermistor TH1 the main ther mistor is moved back and forth over a distance of about 12 mm in the axial direction of the fixing upper roller The drive comes from the web drive solenoid SL9 and is sent to the reciprocating cam by way of a one way arm The control system of the thermistor reciproca...

Page 397: ...m Distance of travel 3 mm approx 2 6 Controlling the Reciprocating Mechanism of the Upper Separation Claw To prevent damage to the fixing upper roller by the upper separation claw the upper sepa ration claw is moved back and forth in the axial direction of the fixing upper roller The system used to control the reciprocating mechanism of the upper separation claw is constructed as follows F06 206 0...

Page 398: ...roller Fixing lower roller PS4 Internal paper detection signal IDS J106 B1 Claw jam detection signal CJAM J106 B19 Web length detection signal CBOP J106 B5 Main thermistor signal TH1 J108 B7 Main heater drive signal MHRD J102 B11 Sub heater drive signal SHRD J102 B9 Main thermistor TH1 AC power supply Web guide plate PS45 PS35 Sub thermistor signal TH2 J106 B9 Main heater detection signal MHRD J10...

Page 399: ...Used to decrease the control temperature thus sav ing on power consumption Used to decrease the print start temperature by 15 C to reduce print time for iR5000 4 min or less for iR6000 1 min or less Used to switch the down sequence temperature in creases the fixing temperature by 10 C Used to switch the down sequence temperature de creases the fixing temperature by 10 C Used to increase the fixing...

Page 400: ...ng motor M3 Main heater H1 100V Sub heater H2 SLEEP WMUP WMUPR 1 STBY INTR PSTBY PRINT LSTR STBY Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON 205 C 200 C 195 C Start key ON 210 C 120 230V Sub heater H2 1 For the iR6000i 100V model the WMUPR period in H mode is increased by 1 min 215 C H mode M L mode F06 302 01 T06 302 02 Control temperature Ambient temperature Initial multiple rotation Stan...

Page 401: ...xing motor M3 Main heater H1 100V Sub heater H2 SLEEP WMUP WMUPR STBY INTR PSTBY PRINT LSTR STBY Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON Fixing assembly 195 C 205 C 200 C 195 C 200 C Start key ON 210 C 120 130V Sub heater H2 215 C F06 302 02 Control temperature Initial multiple rotation Standby Start of printing During printing 195 C 200 C 200 C 203 C T06 302 03 ...

Page 402: ...emperature the machine increases the sheet to sheet interval to maintain a specific fixing temperature so as to prevent faulty fixing in continuous printing mode iR5000i Down Sequence Model Control temperature 50 cpm return mode 40 cpm mode 35 cpm mode print stop 100 V 170 C 165 C 160 C 155 C 120 230 V 175 C 170 C 165 C 160 C Control temperature iR6000i Down Sequence 60 cpm return mode 50 cpm mode...

Page 403: ...e images If text mode is used in combination with a non text mode the machine will use non text mode down sequence throughout the job by placing priority on fixing iR5000i Down Sequence Model Control temperature 50 cpm return mode 40 cpm mode 35 cpm mode print stop 100 V 180 C 175 C 170 C 165 C 120 230 V 185 C 180 C 175 C 170 C Control temperature iR6000i Down Sequence 60 cpm return mode 50 cpm mo...

Page 404: ...prevent overheating d Jam Recovery Mode The sequence used after jam removal differs depending on the following conditions 1 If paper exists in the fixing feeding assembly The fixing heater will be turned off in response to a jam and post jam removal initial multiple rotation will be excluded 2 If no paper exists in the fixing feeding assembly The temperature control mechanism is turned on without ...

Page 405: ...the main thermistor TH1 2 Sensor error by the sub thermistor TH2 3 Overheating error by the thermal switch TP1 DC controller PCB J106B 1 1 1 7 8 10 20 S TEMP 2 0V 0V M TEMP 1 Fixing upper roller Main heater Sub thermistor Main thermistor Thermal switch 9 J102B 1 11 10 0V 12V SUB_HT_ON 3 MAIN_DETECT 6 MAIN_HT_ON 5 SUB_DETECT 4 9 14 AC line off at 240 C RLY Relay Front cover AC driver 12 13 Sub heat...

Page 406: ...heater has an open circuit The AC driver PCB is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty E001 The main thermistor TH1 has a short circuit The sub thermistor TH2 has detected overheating The AC driver PCB is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty E002 The main thermistor TH1 has poor contact or an open circuit The thermal switch TP1 has an open circuit The fixing heater has an open circuit The AC dri...

Page 407: ...cated the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it 3 The screws must be identified by type length diameter and location 4 The mounting screw of the grounding wire and the varistors is equipped with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity They must not be left out when fitting the screws 5 As a rule the machine must not be operated with any of its parts remove...

Page 408: ...over 3 F06 401 01 3 Slide the fixing feeding unit out of the machine 4 While pressing the stoppers 5 on both ends of the fixing feeding unit slide rail 4 pull the fixing feeding unit farther toward the front 5 With the fixing feeding unit fully out insert a think screwdriver into the hole 6 of the rails on both sides then while releasing the stoppers pull the fixing feeding unit 7 to the front to ...

Page 409: ...ng Assembly 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the three screws 1 and the knob 2 then detach the fixing feeding left cover 3 F06 401 03 3 Disconnect the two connectors 4 and remove the three screws 5 then de tach the fixing drive assembly 6 F06 401 04 4 Disconnect the three connectors 7 and free the harness from the harness guide F06 401 05 7 7 ...

Page 410: ... 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 23 P 9 8 12 11 13 10 5 Remove the mounting screw 8 and detach the cover 9 F06 401 06 6 Open the fixing delivery assembly and remove the two screws 10 then hold ing the front 12 and the rear 13 of the fixing assembly 11 remove the fixing assembly from the machine F06 401 07 ...

Page 411: ... Fixing Web 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing assembly upper cover 2 F06 402 01 3 Remove the two screws 3 used to hold the fixing web assembly in place and open the fixing web upper assembly F06 402 02 4 While pushing the web feed roller 4 and the web take up roller 5 toward the rear remove the web 6 F06 402 03 2 1 3 5 6 4 ...

Page 412: ...2 04 4 2 2 Mounting the Fixing Web Mount the fixing web by reversing the steps used to remove it 1 Wind the web 2 around the web take up roller 1 two or three times while making sure that the arm guide plate 3 will be outside the take up roller when attaching to the front At this time check to make sure that the area of contact with the roller is impreg nated with oil F06 402 05 Check to make sure...

Page 413: ...MISC FIX WEB COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 FIX WEB F06 402 07 4 2 3 Adjusting the Fixing Web Solenoid SL9 a If the fixing web is new Adjust the position of the solenoid us ing the screw 2 so that the distance of travel of the drive lever 1 is 8 6 mm F06 402 08 b If the fixing web has been used Before removing the solenoid find out the position A of the drive lever when the solenoid turns on then after rep...

Page 414: ...e machine 2 Remove the two fastons 1 and the two screws 2 at the rear then detach the heater positioning plate rear 3 F06 403 01 3 Remove the screw 4 and the faston 5 at the front and detach the harness cover 6 The harness is equipped with a tie wrap Be sure to use a new tie wrap if you have cut the tie wrap F06 403 02 4 Remove the screw 7 and detach the heater positioning plate front 8 5 Remove t...

Page 415: ...the main heater 1 to the right and the sub heater 2 to the left view ing from the front of the fixing assem bly d Stagger the heater so that its protrusion will not interfere e When mounting the faston of the fixing heater at the rear be sure that the faston terminals A B do not face the outside rather they must be parallel with the holder F06 403 05 4 3 3 Removing the Thermal Switch 1 Remove the ...

Page 416: ...4 Remove the four screws 7 and detach the thermal switch assembly 8 F06 403 07 5 Remove the two screws 9 and detach the thermal switch 10 F06 403 08 4 3 4 Removing the Main Thermistor 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the machine 2 Remove the fixing web and the oil pan 3 Remove the fixing harness cover 4 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the insulating plate 2 F06 403 09 9 9 10 1 2 8 7 7 6 4 4 5 ...

Page 417: ...When shifting the thermistor assembly to the rear take care not to damage the fixing roller by the thermistor assembly When mounting the thermistor be sure that the harness 3 is on the inner side of the harness guide 6 of the mounting plate Further take care not to deform section A when detaching and attaching the thermistor F06 403 10 7 Remove the two thermistor retaining springs 7 and detach the...

Page 418: ...mistor 1 Slide out the fixing assembly from the machine 2 Remove the fixing web and the oil pan 3 Remove the fixing harness cover 4 Free the harness 1 of the sub ther mistor from the harness guide 5 Remove the screw 2 and detach the sub thermistor assembly 3 F06 403 12 6 Remove the screw 4 and detach the sub thermistor 5 F06 403 13 4 5 1 3 2 ...

Page 419: ...ng web and clean the oil pan 3 Remove the two fixing heaters 4 Remove the stopper 1 one each from the front and the rear 5 While paying attention to the thermal switch and the thermistor detach the upper roller assembly F06 404 01 6 Remove the C ring 2 at the front and remove the gear 3 bushing 4 and bearing 5 7 Remove the C ring 6 at the rear and remove the gear 7 bearing 8 and bushing 9 F06 404 ...

Page 420: ... that cut off A is toward the rear as shown c Before mounting it clean the electrode plate and the elec trode terminals F06 404 03 4 4 3 Removing the Fixing Lower Roller 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the machine 2 Remove the fixing web and clean and remove the oil pan 3 Open the fixing upper unit 4 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the lower separation claw support plate 2 F06 404 04 5 Remove...

Page 421: ...P CHK b Standard 1 Measure the points indicated a and c are prints 10 mm from both edges of the sheet F06 404 06 2 Check to make sure the measurements are as indicated if not go to c to make adjustments Be sure that both upper and lower rollers are sufficiently heated when taking measure ments T06 404 01 c Making Adjustments 1 Take the fixing assembly out of the ma chine 2 Open the delivery assemb...

Page 422: ...e spring 1 and remove the upper separation claw 2 When mounting it take care not to chip the tip of the upper sepa ration claw 2 F06 405 01 4 5 2 Removing the Lower Separation Claw 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the machine 2 Remove the two screws and detach the lower separation claw assembly 3 Remove the spring 1 of the lower separation claw F06 405 02 4 Remove the three screws 2 and detach th...

Page 423: ...ler 1 Remove the fixing feeding unit out of the machine 2 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the delivery roller guide 2 F06 406 01 3 Remove the screw 3 and the bushing 4 then detach the delivery unit 5 4 Remove the E ring 6 at the front and detach the bearing 7 F06 406 02 5 Slide the external delivery roller assem bly 8 toward the rear to detach F06 406 03 1 2 1 3 4 5 7 6 8 ...

Page 424: ...ed with a parallel pin 10 Take care not to drop it F06 406 04 4 6 2 Removing the Internal Delivery Roller 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the machine 2 Remove the lower separation claw plate 3 Remove the two E rings 1 at the front and remove the gear 2 and the bearing 3 F06 406 05 4 Remove the E ring 4 at the rear and remove the bearing 5 and the internal delivery roller 6 F06 406 06 11 9 10 1 2...

Page 425: ... 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 6 38 P 4 6 3 Adjusting the Position of the Delivery Flapper Solenoid SL5 Adjust the position of the solenoid using the screw 2 so that the drive lever 1 is fully pushed when the solenoid turns on i e the plunger is drawn F06 406 07 2 1 ...

Page 426: ...Remove the mounting screw 1 and detach the sensor together with its sup port plate 2 F06 407 01 5 Disconnect the connector 3 and re move the snap on assembly then de tach the claw jam sensor 4 F06 407 02 4 7 2 Removing the Internal Delivery Sensor 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the machine 2 Remove the two screws and detach the lower separation claw assembly 3 Remove the internal delivery rolle...

Page 427: ... snap on assembly then de tach the internal delivery sensor 4 F06 407 04 4 7 3 Removing the Delivery Jam Sensor 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the machine 2 Remove the external delivery roller 3 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the sensor support plate 2 F06 407 05 4 Disconnect the connector 3 and de tach the delivery jam sensor 4 F06 407 06 4 3 2 1 4 3 ...

Page 428: ...M 6 41 P 4 7 4 Removing the External Delivery Sensor 1 Remove the fixing feeding unit from the machine 2 Remove the external delivery roller 3 Remove the two sensors 1 and detach the sensor support plate 2 F06 407 07 4 Disconnect the connector 3 and de tach the external delivery sensor 4 F06 407 08 2 1 4 3 ...

Page 429: ... in the Field 1 The inlet guide must be positioned as indicated 2 The inlet guide must shift down when the solenoid SL1 turns on 3 The height of the inlet guide must be such that the difference between front and rear is 0 5 mm or less 4 The height of the inlet guide must be adjusted by loosening the fixing screw on the height adjusting support plate If the inlet guide base is removed the position ...

Page 431: ...OPIER FUNCTION PANEL LED CHK Used to start a check on the activation of LEDs in the control panel COPIER FUNCTION PANEL LED OFF Used to end a check on the activation of LEDs in the control panel COPIER FUNCTION PANEL KEY CHK Used to start a check on key inputs COPIER FUNCTION PANEL TOUCHCHK Used to adjust the coordinates in the touch panel CPU Control panel inverter PCB LCD PCB Control panel PCB k...

Page 432: ...arge fan Controller cooling fan De curling fan DC power supply fan Hard disk fan Duplexing feeding fan Function Draws print paper to the feed belt Cools the primary charging assem bly and cleaner Discharges exhaust of each fan to the outside of the machine Cools the laser unit drive unit and controller Removes curling of print paper af ter fixing Cools the power supply PCB Cools the hard disk Cool...

Page 433: ...CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 7 3 P The arrangement of the fans and the direction of air are as follows F07 201 01 FM3 FM1 FM4 FM2 FM5 FM8 FM6 FM7 ...

Page 434: ...ontrol panel switch OFF Feed fan FM1 DC power supply FM6 Duplexing feeding fan FM8 Heat discharge fan FM3 Primary charging cooling fan FM2 De curling fan FM5 Controller cooling fan FM4 Hard disk fan FM7 Warm up Printer unit Initial multiple rotation Standby Printing Low power mode Door open Jam After printing yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyy yyyyy yyyyy yyyyy yyyyy yyyyyy yyyyyy yyy...

Page 435: ...er switch SW4 Main relay RL1 Description Generates DC power from AC power Protects against overcurrent Limits rush current to the fixing feeding assembly duplexing unit and high voltage PCB Protects the lens heater H6 and mirror heater H7 against overcurrent Serves as the power switch of a load other than the drum heater H3 cassette heater H4 and deck heater H5 When off the drum heater H3 operates...

Page 436: ... OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON Half wave ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF Half wave OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON Half wave ON ON ON ON Control panel switch OFF ON ON OFF Full wave OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON Full wave ON ON ON ON Printing ON ON OFF Half wave OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON Half wave 1 OFF OFF ON ON Power save ON ON OFF Full wave OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON Full wave ON ON ON ON 1 If underlined applies to the 100V mode...

Page 437: ...24V 24VU 5V 24V 3 3VA 24V 24VU 5V Laser driver PCB Laser scanner motor 24VU3 Finisher accessory ADF 24VU Paper deck accessory 24VU2 NE data controller accessory ON signal Accessory power supply 5V 24VU2 5V 12VU Motor driver PCB Main motor M2 Drum motor M1 24V 5V 24V 24VU1 5V 5V Main relay RL1 Thermal switch TP1 Sub heater H2 Duplexing driver PCB Control panel CPU PCB Control panel switch Accessori...

Page 438: ...wer supply PCB as follows based on the combina tion of the signal from the printer board and the state of the power switch and the control panel switch T07 301 04 Main power switch SW1 OFF ON ON Control panel switch or print board signal OFF OFF ON Power output from DC power supply PCB None 3 3VB All Remarks If the environment switch SW3 is ON the drum heater will be supplied with power AC In addi...

Page 439: ...rotection 3VA1 J4014 1 J4014 2 J4014 3 J4014 4 J4014 5 3VA2 J4017 1 J4017 2 J4017 3 J4017 4 J4017 5 3 3 4V 9 0A 5 5 to 8 0A 3VA3 J4003 7 3VB J4015 1 J4015 2 J4015 3 2 2 5 3 5V 2 5A 4 0 to 8 0A 5V J4003 5 J4004 1 J4008 1 J4009 1 J4016 1 J4016 2 3 5 1V 4 5A 1 0 to 5 0A 12VU J4003 3 J4003 4 5 12 0V 1 0A 2 5 to 5 0A Output Connector Output voltage tolerance Rated output voltage Rated output current Le...

Page 440: ...n circuit 2 detects over current the machine will stop out puts 2 and 3 Likewise when the over current circuit 3 detects a high level of current the machine will stop output 3 The machine is also equipped with a fuse to cut off outputs in the event any of the ele ments in circuits fails Output 2 Sequence control circuit 3VA1 3VA2 3VA3 5V 12VU Output stop signal Output 3 DC power supply PCB Convert...

Page 441: ...achine operation Stops outputs 1 2 and 3 of the DC power supply PCB Stops outputs 1 and 2 of the DC power supply PCB Stops output 3 of the DC power supply PCB Resetting Turn off the main power switch and remove the cause then leave the machine alone for about 3 min and turn on the main power switch Remove the cause and turn off and then on the control panel power switch Remove the cause then turn ...

Page 442: ...volution of the laser scanner motor is reduced 1 2 to lower the machine s operating noise when it is in standby state The time interval used by the ma chine to shift to silent mode is set in user mode The machine has to wait until the revolution of the laser scanner motor returns from silent mode to normal taking a while longer than otherwise before it starts printing ...

Page 443: ... indicated the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it 3 The screws must be identified by type length diameter and location 4 The mounting screw of the grounding wire and the varistors is equipped with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity They must not be left out when fitting the screws 5 As a rule the machine must not be operated with any of its parts r...

Page 444: ... Front cover 1 2 Upper cover 3 3 Upper cover base 4 4 Right rear paper cover 3 5 Right rear lower cover 2 6 Reader right cover 2 7 Reader front cover right upper cover right upper cover base reader right left cover 2 screws Externals 1 F07 501 01 8 Rear upper cover 4 9 PCB cover 4 10 Rear lower cover 7 11 Filter cover 1 12 Left lower cover 5 2 grip covers 13 Left upper cover 7 delivery assembly co...

Page 445: ...e 2 2 Remove the stopper 4 and detach the hinge shaft 5 by pulling it up 3 Pull the front cover up at an angle to detach F07 501 03 5 1 3 Removing the Top Plate 1 Remove the reader unit 2 Remove the fixing plates 2 pc each at front and rear of the reader unit 3 Remove the right upper cover and the right upper cover base 4 Open the manual feed cover 5 Remove the four mounting screws and detach the ...

Page 446: ...2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 5 2 Arrangement of Electrical Parts rear of the machine The following shows the arrangement of the electrical parts found on the back of the ma chine after removing the following four parts main controller box assembly p 7 22P DC controller PCB p 7 46P waste toner bottle p 7 33P high voltage PCB p 7 24P F07 502 01 ...

Page 447: ...tor M4 Left deck level sensor upper lower PS49 PS50 12 Power supply transformer 13 Cassette 3 length detection cassette 3 level detection SVR2 cassette 3 paper width detection SVR4 14 Cassette 4 length detection cassette 4 level detection SVR3 cassette 4 paper width detection SVR5 15 Right deck pickup releasing solenoid SL7 16 Vertical path lower motor M27 17 Right deck pickup motor M11 18 Right d...

Page 448: ...ol Panel 5 3 1 Removing the Control Panel 1 Remove the reader unit 2 Open the front cover and slide out the pickup feeding unit to the front 3 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the front door switch cover 2 F07 503 01 4 Remove the six screws 3 and discon nect the connector 4 then detach the control panel 5 F07 503 02 1 2 5 3 3 4 ...

Page 449: ...he mounting screw 1 to detach con trol panel mounting plate 2 then re move the four screws 3 and detach the control panel bottom cover 4 F07 503 03 3 Remove the two flat cables 5 and dis connect the five connectors 6 and re move the four mounting screws 7 then detach the control panel CPU PCB 8 F07 503 04 4 Remove the ten mounting screws 9 and detach the shielding plate 10 F07 503 05 3 3 4 1 2 5 7...

Page 450: ...ors 12 of the control panel inverter PCB 11 then remove the four mounting screws 13 and detach the LCD panel 14 F07 503 06 5 3 3 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB 1 Remove the control panel 2 Disconnect the two connectors 1 and remove the four mounting screws 2 then detach there control panel inverter PCB 3 F07 503 07 12 12 13 14 13 11 2 3 1 1 2 ...

Page 451: ...5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 7 21 P 5 3 4 Removing the Control Panel Family PCB 1 Remove the control panel 2 Remove the shielding plate 3 Remove the mounting screw and detach the control panel family PCB 4 F07 503 08 1 1 ...

Page 452: ... new PCBs at that time be sure to refer to the color of each round label attached to the EEP ROM for correct transfer Be sure to enter the values indicated on the label 3 on the new PCB in service mode by making the following selections COPIER ADJUST HV TR D PRE TR COPIER ADJUST HV TR D HV TR COPIER ADJUST HV SP D HV SP COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP D HV DE Be sure to transfer the shorting connector 4 of ...

Page 453: ... P 5 4 2 Removing the Main Controller Box 1 Remove the rear upper cover 2 Remove the right rear lower cover and detach the right rear upper cover 3 Remove the four mounting screws 1 and detach the controller cover 2 F07 504 03 4 Remove the six mounting screws 3 and detach the differential PCB 4 F07 504 04 2 1 1 3 4 3 3 3 ...

Page 454: ...TERNALS AND CONTROLS 7 24 P 5 5 5 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 10 5 Remove the six mounting screws 5 and disconnect the connector 6 then detach the LIPS board 7 and the RISER board 8 together with the mounting plate 90 F07 504 05 6 Disconnect the three connectors 10 and detach the differential PCB 4 F07 504 06 ...

Page 455: ... 13 14 15 16 16 13 13 16 16 17 7 Remove the three mounting screws 11 and detach the hard disk cable mounting plate 12 F07 504 07 8 Disconnect the eight connectors 13 and disconnect the hard disk cable 14 and the flat cable 15 then remove the five mounting screws 16 and open the main controller box 17 to detach it up ward F07 504 08 ...

Page 456: ...Ethernet PCB 1 Remove the LIPS board RISER board and differential PCB 2 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the Ethernet PCB 2 F07 504 09 5 4 4 Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 Open the main controller box 2 Remove the Ethernet PCB 3 Remove the mounting screw 1 and detach the PCB guide 2 1 pc each upper lower F07 504 10 1 2 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 457: ...11 To replace the main controller PCB be sure to transfer the counter memory PCB 6 to the new PCB by removing the screw 5 5 4 5 Remove the Differential PCB See steps 1 through 4 used to remove the main controller box 5 4 6 Removing the LIPS PCB 1 Remove the differential PCB 2 Remove the LIPS PCB and the RISER PCB together with the mounting plate 3 Remove the four mounting screws 1 and detach the L...

Page 458: ... REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 7 28 P 5 4 7 Removing the RISER PCB 1 Remove the Differential PCB 2 Detach the LIPS PCB and the RISER PCB together with the mounting plate 3 Remove the four mounting screws 1 and detach the RISER PCB 2 F07 504 13 1 1 2 ...

Page 459: ...ft lower cover When doing so be sure to slide out the right deck and the cassettes in advance 2 Remove the seven screws 1 and de tach the shielding plate 2 F07 504 14 3 Remove the 11 screws 3 and detach the power supply cover 4 F07 504 15 4 Disconnect the 15 connectors and re move the two screws 5 then detach the power supply PCB 6 F07 504 16 1 1 2 3 3 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 460: ...1 and discon nect the nine connectors then detach the high voltage power supply PCB 2 F07 504 17 When replacing the PCBs keep the following mind Be sure to enter the values indicated on the label attached to the new PCB indicated by an arrow 3 in service mode by making the follow ing selections COPIER ADJUST HV TR H PRE TR COPIER ADJUST HV TR HVT TR COPIER ADJUST HV SP HVT SP COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP...

Page 461: ...s 1 and discon nect the six connectors 2 then detach the power cord base 3 F07 504 18 3 Remove the three screws 4 and dis connect the two connectors 5 then detach the accessories power supply PCB 6 F07 504 19 5 4 11 AC Driver PCB 1 Remove the rear upper lower cover and the left upper lower cover 2 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the three connectors 2 then de tach the AC driver PCB 3 F07 5...

Page 462: ... the waste toner bottle 2 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the PCB cover 2 F07 504 21 3 Remove the six screws 3 and discon nect the 11 connectors detach the mo tor driver PCB 4 F07 504 22 5 4 13 Anti Rush Current PCB 1 Remove the DC controller PCB 2 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the three connectors 2 then detach the anti rush current PCB 3 from the DC controller mounting base F07 504 23 1 2...

Page 463: ...S AND CONTROLS 7 33 P 5 4 14 Serial Number PCB 1 Remove the DC controller PCB 2 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the connector 2 then detach the fixing assembly terminal base 3 3 Remove the four screws 4 and dis connect the connector 5 then detach the serial number PCB 6 F07 504 24 4 1 2 3 5 6 1 ...

Page 464: ... and dis connect the connector 2 then detach the exhaust fan duct 3 F07 505 01 3 Remove the two screws 4 and discon nect the connector 5 then detach the fan grille 6 to detach the exhaust fan 7 F07 505 02 5 5 2 Feeding Fan 1 Remove the DC controller PCB 2 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the primary fan cover 2 3 Remove the three screws 3 and detach the primary fan 4 F07 505 03 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1...

Page 465: ... HDD unit See p 7 51P 3 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the HDD fan unit 3 F07 505 04 4 Remove the two screws 4 and detach the HDD fan 6 from the duct 5 F07 505 05 5 5 4 DC Power Supply Fan 1 Remove the power supply PCB 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and re move the three screws 2 then detach the DC power supply fan 3 F07 505 06 2 1 3 4 6 5 3 2 2 2 1 ...

Page 466: ...ront cover 2 Take out the hopper assembly 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and re move the two mounting screws 2 then detach the primary charging cool ing fan assembly 3 F07 505 07 4 Remove the four muting screws 4 and detach the filter mounting plate 5 F07 505 08 5 Remove the two mounting screws 6 and detach the primary charging cool ing fan 7 F07 505 09 1 2 2 3 5 4 6 6 7 ...

Page 467: ...nnect the connector 2 then detach the left deck drive assembly 3 F07 506 01 5 6 2 Vertical Path Duplex Right Deck Drive Assembly 1 Remove the waste toner bottle holder 2 Remove the the five screws 1 and de tach the grip base 2 F07 506 02 3 Remove the four screws 3 and dis connect the five connectors 4 then release the four cable clamps 5 and detach the vertical path duplex right deck drive assembl...

Page 468: ...ach the belt 5 3 Remove the screw 6 and detach the fixing member 7 4 Remove the five screws 8 and discon nect the connector 9 then detach the main motor drive assembly 10 F07 506 04 5 6 4 Manual Feed Pickup Drive Assembly 1 Remove the main controller box 2 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the scanner fan duct 2 3 Loosen the screw 3 to release the belt tensioner 4 and detach the belt 5 F07 506 05...

Page 469: ...ler Drive Assembly 1 Remove the DC controller base 2 Remove the feeding fan See p 7 28P 3 Remove the waste toner bottle holder 4 Remove the waste toner drive assembly 5 Remove the main motor 6 Remove the four screws 1 and dis connect the connector 2 then detach the left deck pull out roller drive assem bly 3 F07 506 08 5 6 7 Drum Drive Assembly 1 Slide out the hopper assembly 2 Remove the drum fix...

Page 470: ...t rear lower cover rear lower cover and waste toner bottle 3 By referring to step 3 for the main mo tor remove the main power switch base out of the way 4 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the two connectors 2 then de tach the connector base 3 F07 506 10 5 Remove the three screws 4 and detach the waste toner holder 5 Take care not to let the waste toner go astray F07 506 11 6 Remove the four...

Page 471: ... detach the cassette pickup motor 9 F07 506 13 8 Remove the three screws 10 and dis connect the two connectors 11 then remove the lifter drive assembly 12 F07 506 14 9 Remove the three screws 13 and de tach the vertical path drive assembly 14 10 Remove the cassette 3 4 pickup assem bly See p 5 55P 11 Remove the three screws 15 and de tach the cassette pickup drive assembly 16 F07 506 15 ...

Page 472: ...V 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 7 42 P 2 1 3 1 1 5 6 9 Left Deck Lifter Drive Assembly 1 Remove the high voltage power supply PCB 2 Remove the three screws 1 and dis connect the two connectors 2 then detach the left deck lifter drive assem bly 3 F07 506 16 ...

Page 473: ...e the waste toner box 3 Remove the four screws 1 and dis connect the connector then detach the vertical path lower motor 2 F07 507 01 5 7 2 Main Motor M2 1 Remove the main controller box 2 Remove the right rear lower cover 3 Remove the three screws 1 and re lease the two clamps 2 then remove the main power switch base 3 out of the way F07 507 02 4 Remove the three screws 4 and dis connect the conn...

Page 474: ...o step 3 for the main mo tor remove the main power switch base out of the way 4 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the two connectors 2 then de tach the connector base 3 F07 507 04 5 Remove the three screws 4 and detach the waste toner bottle holder 5 Take care not to let the waste toner go astray F07 507 05 6 Remove the three screws 6 and dis connect the connector 7 then detach the vertical ...

Page 475: ...ith its base F07 507 07 10 Remove the two screws 17 and detach the cassette pickup motor 18 F07 507 08 5 7 4 Pre Registration Motor M17 and Drum Motor M1 1 Remove the reader rear cover rear up per cover and right rear upper cover 2 Remove the main controller box 3 Remove the E ring 1 and bushing 2 4 Disconnect the connector 3 and re move the two screws 4 then detach the pre registration motor M17 ...

Page 476: ...NON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 7 46 P 8 10 9 9 6 Disconnect the two connectors 8 and remove the four screws 9 then detach the drum motor 10 F07 507 10 ...

Page 477: ...waste toner bottle holder 3 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the cable support base 2 F07 508 01 4 Remove the two screws 3 and detach the right deck pickup roller releasing solenoid 4 F07 508 02 5 8 2 Adjusting the Position of the Right Deck Pickup Solenoid SL6 Adjust the position of the solenoid so that the left edge of the arm 2 is 57 2 0 5 mm from the center of the hole A in the solenoid mo...

Page 478: ...w 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the pickup roller releasing solenoid 3 F07 508 04 5 8 4 Adjusting the Position of the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid SL7 When replacing the solenoid on its own be sure to mount it in its initial position Take note of the position of the fixing screw 2 before detaching the left deck pickup solenoid from the support plate 1 Or mark the position of the soleno...

Page 479: ... the reader rear cover rear upper cover right rear upper cover 2 Remove the main controller box 3 Remove the grip ring 1 and bushing 2 then disconnect the connector 3 and remove the two screws 4 and de tach the manual feed pickup clutch CL4 5 4 Remove the two screws 6 and detach the flywheel 7 F07 509 01 5 Remove the three screws 8 and dis connect the connector 9 then detach the developing clutch ...

Page 480: ...ngth Sensor 1 Remove the exhaust fan duct 2 If the cassette 4 sensor is to be removed remove the two screws 1 disconnect the two connectors 2 and detach the connector base 3 F07 510 01 3 Remove the two screws 4 each and disconnect the connector 5 cassette 3 paper size width sensor 6 cassette 3 paper side length sensor 7 cassette 4 paper size width sensor 8 cassette 4 paper side length sensor 9 F07...

Page 481: ...ur when replac ing the HDD unit 2 Take care not to subject the HDD unit to impact 1 Remove the reader rear cover 2 Remove the reader unit fixing plate rear 3 Remove the rear upper cover Keep the hard disk cover intact when doing so 4 Remove the main controller cover F07 504 03 5 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and remove the hard disk cable retain ing plate 2 F07 511 01 6 Remove the two mounting ...

Page 482: ...ER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 7 52 P 7 Fit the handle of the screwdriver be tween the reader unit and the printer unit then lift the reader unit and take out the hard disk unit 4 F07 511 01 8 Disconnect the connector 5 and the flat cable 7 then detach the hard disk unit 4 F07 511 04 4 6 5 4 ...

Page 483: ...7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 7 53 P 9 Remove the two mounting screws 7 and detach the hard disk cover 8 F07 511 05 10 Remove the four mounting screws 9 and detach the hard disk 10 F07 511 06 When mounting the HDD unit be sure that the flat cable is be low the film sheet of the HDD case 7 8 10 9 9 ...

Page 484: ...ting the HDD unit be sure that the flat cable is un der the plastic sheet of the HDD upper case 2 Remove the nine screws 1 and dis connect the 26 connectors then detach the DC controller PCB base F07 512 01 5 12 2 Relay 1 Remove the rear upper lower cover and left upper lower cover 2 Disconnect the cable connected to the relay and remove the two screws 1 then detach the relay 2 F07 512 02 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 485: ...55 P 5 12 3 Power Supply Transformer 1 Remove the high voltage power supply PCB 2 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the two connectors 2 then slide the transfer unit 3 to the left to detach F07 512 03 3 Remove the two screws 4 and discon nect the connector 5 then detach the transformer 6 F07 512 04 3 1 2 4 4 6 5 ...

Page 487: ...DPFD J12 1 2 3 J17 3 2 1 J17 6 5 4 5VR DPSP J18 1 2 3 5VR 5VR DPL J19 1 2 3 J09 5 4 3 PS106 PS107 PS108 When paper is detected 1 When paper is absent in the deck 1 When the deck lifter is at the upper limit 1 When the lifter is in pick position 1 When the deck is set to the copier 1 When paper is detected 1 When the deck lifter is in paper supply position 1 When the absence of paper 1 2 level is d...

Page 488: ...PD J10 1 3 SW102 J21 2 1 DLLD J08 8 7 DOLON NO NO 0VU Power supply J03 J719 Deck open switch Deck open indicator Open switch PCB Deck open detecting switch Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch Deck driver PCB When SW100 is pushed to open the deck 0 When the deck is opening closing 0 LED turns on or flashes while the deck lifter is rotating When the deck is open 1 SW101 is not pushed When the d...

Page 489: ...01 J22 1 2 J17 9 10 J8 11 12 J08 9 10 J01 1 2 3 4 5 6 See p 8 14P See p 8 15P CL102 24VU DPUCD J13 2 1 J05 11 12 DPRSD 24VU SL101 J9 2 1 J8 1 2 J05 1 2 DOPSD 24VU SL102 J23 2 1 J09 1 2 24V 24V DMMA DMMA DMMB DMMB Deck main motor Deck lifter motor Deck pickup clutch Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid Deck open solenoid Deck driver PCB When 0 ON When 0 ON When 0 ON ...

Page 490: ...e lifter and is kept in position at a specific point of pickup When the Start key is pressed and as a result the deck pickup clutch CL102 turns on the drive of the deck main motor M101 rotates the pickup roller to pickup paper At this time the pickup feed roller and the separation roller serve to make sure that only one sheet of paper is moved forward then when the deck pickup sensor PS101 detects...

Page 491: ... PAPER DECK 8 5 P F08 102 01 PS106 PS101 CL102 M101 SL101 DC controller PCB host machine Deck driver PCB Deck feed detection signal DPFD Deck pickup clutch drive signal DPUCD Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid drive signal DPRSD Deck main motor drive signal Deck pickup detection signal DPPD ...

Page 492: ...JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 8 6 P 1 2 3 Sequence of Operations pickup from the deck F08 102 02 INTR LSTR STBY Deck main motor M101 Deck pickup clutch CL102 Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid SL101 Deck pickup sensor PS101 Deck feed sensor PS106 SCAN PRINT Start key ON ...

Page 493: ...aper detecting lever of the pickup roller assembly moves past the deck paper sensor the Add Paper message will be indicates in the control panel of the host machine F08 103 01 F08 103 02 1 3 2 Switching the Deck Paper Size The paper size of the deck may be switched by relocating the guide plate inside the deck to suit the needs of the user the new paper size must then be entered in service mode CO...

Page 494: ...vel of paper inside its compartment it can also indicate the detected level in the control panel of its host machine The following shows how the level is determined with reference to the combination of the states of sensors and how each level is indicated Level of paper 100 to about 50 about 50 to about 10 less than 10 No paper 1 light blocking plate over the sensor 0 light blocking plate not over...

Page 495: ...p surface of the stack of paper on the lifter If the lifter fails to stop moving up after the sensor lever blocks the deck lifter position sensor for some reason the deck lifter upper limit sensor PS103 will turn on to prevent damage otherwise caused by the deck The lifter on the other hand starts to move down when the deck open switch SW100 is pushed it continues to move down unit it moves past t...

Page 496: ...ller Deck pickup feed roller Deck separation roller Lifter Deck lifter motor Deck main motor Deck OPEN detecting switch SW101 Deck paper supply position sensor PS107 Deck lifter position sensor PS104 Deck liter upper limit sensor PS103 Deck open switch SW100 Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch SW102 Deck lifter cable Deck paper level sensor PS108 ...

Page 497: ...t moving up and down within the display window in the deck front cover in keeping with the movement of the rack When the level of paper decreases and as a result the lifter moves to pickup position the area of the black belt within the display window increases while the area of white indicat ing the amount of paper decreases enabling a check on the level of paper F08 104 02 M102 Black belt Rack Di...

Page 498: ...deck open sensor PS109 detects the light blocking plate of the compartment and the lifter is let to move up to pickup position When the deck lifter motor rotates for opening or closing the deck the deck open indica tor LED100 located on the open switch PCB remains on or flashes F08 105 01 Deck lifter lower limit detection signal DLLD J08 8 Deck lifter motor drive signal J08 M102 DC controller PCB ...

Page 499: ...ashing Compartment open OFF Deck open switch ON Deck open indicator LED100 Deck lifter motor M102 Deck paper supply position sensor PS107 Deck open detecting switch SW101 Deck open solenoid SL1020 Deck lifter position sensor PS104 Deck lifter DOWN Deck lifter UP Compartment set Varies depending on the size of the stack Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch SW102 Deck open sensor PS109 ...

Page 500: ...ck main motor a Turning On and Off the Motor The deck main motor is turned on or off by controlling the output of the pulse signals from the host machine DMMA DMMA DMMB DMMB b Changing the Speed of Rotation of the Motor The deck is designed to automatically change the speed at which paper is moved in con sideration of future models of its host machine As such its speed is changed by the motor cloc...

Page 501: ... will indicate an error code 05 may be checked in service mode COPIER DISPLAY ALARM1 BODY 1 Conditions for Moving Up the Lifter The lifter is connected to its host machine i e the deck set signal DSET is 1 The compartment is closed i e the deck open detection signal DOPND is 1 The compartment is closed i e the deck open detecting switch is ON The deck lifter upper limit detection signal DLUL is 0 ...

Page 502: ...fter lower limit detecting switch SW102 Deck lifter lower limit detection signal DLLD PS109 Deck open sensor PS103 Deck lifter upper limit sensor Deck open signal DOPN Deck open detection signal DOPD Deck lifter motor drive signal DLMON Deck lifter UP signal DLUP Deck lifter motor UP drive signal Deck lifter motor DOWN drive signal Commu nication conver sion IC Q16 Note The communication conversio...

Page 503: ...ion to the output of the sensors at such times as programmed in the DC controller of the host machine When the DC controller of the host machine identifies a jam the machine will discharge all sheets moving ahead of the jam and then stop operation at which time it will show in structions on jam removal in the control panel of its host machine F08 201 01 Notation Name Function PS106 Deck feed senso...

Page 504: ...jam under the following conditions 1 When the host machine is turned on or at the end of wait up or in standby paper exits over the deck feed sensor PS106 Deck Pickup Vertical Path Delay Jam F08 201 02 Start key ON Jam indicator ON INTR SCAN PRINT Deck pickup clutch CL102 Jam check Deck pickup sensor PS101 Deck feed sensor PS106 Deck main motor M101 Normal Error ...

Page 505: ... the work 2 Unless otherwise noted assemble the machine by reversing the steps used to disas semble it 3 Identify the screws by type length diameter and location 4 Some mounting screws are equipped with a toothed washer to protect against static elec tricity Be sure to use each washer 5 As a rule do not operate the machine while any of its parts are removed 6 If the deck is equipped with a drier h...

Page 506: ...releasing grip 2 Front upper cover 3 Compartment open close switch 4 Front cover 5 Right cover 6 Upper cover 7 Rear cover F08 301 01 3 1 1 Removing the Front Cover 1 Disconnect the deck from its host ma chine then push down the latch plate 2 of the compartment 1 with your finger to open the compartment 1 F08 301 02 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 rear 1 2 ...

Page 507: ...000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 8 21 P 2 Loosen the four screws 3 and detach the front cover 4 to the front F08 301 03 When mounting the front cover to the deck be sure to match it against the coupling for the pa per level indicator F08 301 04 3 4 Match ...

Page 508: ...ver or moved the deck lifter move the deck lifter to its lower limit and then move the drive belt in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure to the right until it stops so that the area of white increase then mount the front cover If the deck is operated without matching the paper level indica tor and the deck lifter position the drive mechanisms of the pa per level indicator can suffer dam...

Page 509: ...CK 8 23 P 3 1 2 Removing the Rear Cover 1 Disconnect the deck from the host ma chine and remove the six screws 1 then detach the rear cover 2 F08 301 07 3 1 3 Removing the Right Cover 1 Remove the three screws 1 then shift the right cover 2 to the front and de tach it to the rear F08 301 08 1 1 1 2 2 1 ...

Page 510: ...r cover See p 8 23P 2 Push down the latch plate 2 of the compartment 1 with your finger to open the compartment 1 F08 301 09 3 Remove the three screws 3 and dis connect the connector 4 then remove the front upper cover 5 F08 301 10 4 Close the deck vertical path assembly and remove the two screws 6 then detach the upper cover 7 F08 301 11 rear 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 ...

Page 511: ...TER 8 PAPER DECK 8 25 P 3 2 General Descriptions 3 2 1 Disconnecting the Deck from the Host Machine 1 Place a stack of paper 3 about 8 cm in height on the floor for the deck 2 to prevent deforming the roll support plate 1 F08 302 01 2 Remove the right cover See p 8 23P about 8 cm 2 3 3 1 ...

Page 512: ...iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 8 26 P 3 Remove the four screws 5 and detach the deck 6 from the deck base 7 F08 302 02 4 Holding the deck 8 as shown place it on the stack of paper prepared in step 1 F08 302 03 left 5 7 right 6 5 8 ...

Page 513: ...emoving the Compartment 1 Place a stack of paper 3 about 8 cm in height on the floor for the deck 2 to prevent deforming the roll support plate 1 F08 302 04 2 Disconnect the deck from the host ma chine and push down the latch plate 5 of the compartment 4 to open the compartment 4 F08 302 05 about 8 cm 2 3 1 3 rear 5 4 ...

Page 514: ...nt F08 302 06 4 Remove the right cover See p 8 23P 5 Remove the screw 9 of the harness guide and disconnect the connector 10 then remove the three screws 12 each left right of the compartment rails 11 Then while lifting the com partment 8 slightly detach it to the front 6 Place the compartment 8 on the stack of paper prepared in step 1 F08 302 07 left rear of the compartment 7 6 8 9 12 11 12 10 8 ...

Page 515: ...er of the deck is up turn on the host machine then push down the sen sor lever 2 of the paper supply posi tion sensor located inside the compart ment 1 to move the lifter to its lower limit F08 302 08 3 Remove the screw 3 and mount the paper rear end guide plate 4 to suit the new paper size 4 Remove the front cover 5 Remove the screw 5 and mount the left right guide plate 6 to suit the new paper s...

Page 516: ...using the two screws 2 At this time use the index 3 on the latch plate as a refer ence F08 302 10 3 2 5 Adjusting the Roll Position If the compartment cannot be opened closed smoothly requiring adjustment of the roll located at the front of the deck per form the following 1 Remove the front cover See p 8 20P 2 While keeping the compartment fully slid out adjust the four mounting screws 4 on the ro...

Page 517: ... 3 When mounting the pickup clutch be sure to engage the clutch with the stop ring 4 In addition be sure to hook the harness on the U groove 5 of the guide F08 303 01 3 3 2 Removing the Deck Main Motor M101 1 Disconnect the deck from its host ma chine and remove the six screws then detach the rear cover 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and re move the two screws 2 then remove the deck main motor At th...

Page 518: ...remove all paper 2 Turn on the host machine if the lifter of the deck is up push the sensor lever 1 of the paper supply position sensor found inside the compartment with your finger to move the lifter 2 about 7 cm from the base plate of the compartment Then insert a hex wrench into the hole of the lifter drive shaft 3 to hold the shaft in place F08 303 03 F08 303 04 1 2 a b o u t 7 c m 2 3 4 ...

Page 519: ...ving the Lifter Cable front of the deck 1 Open the compartment of the deck and remove all paper 2 Remove the screw and detach the paper rear end guide plate from inside the compartment 3 Push down the sensor lever 1 of the paper supply position sensor inside the compartment to move down the lifter until the left right hole in the compart ment side plate and the left right hole in the lifter match ...

Page 520: ...tach the pulley cover 7 7 Remove the two screws 8 and remove the cable fixing plate 9 on the left then detach the lifter cable 10 8 Remove the two screws 11 and the cable fixing plate 12 on the right then detach the lifter cable 13 9 If you are removing the lifter cable 13 found inside from the pulley 14 also found inside remove the two set screws 16 of the pulley 15 found on the out side and deta...

Page 521: ...move down the lifter until the left right hole in the compartment side plate and the left right hole in the lifer match then insert two long screw drivers 2 At this time try matching the top surface of the lifter with the marking on the left side plate of the compartment to facilitate the work 4 Remove the compartment See p 8 27P 5 Remove the screw 3 and detach the sensor plate 4 6 Remove the scre...

Page 522: ...8 Insert a hex wrench 11 into the home in the lifter drive shaft 10 to hold it in place If you failed to hold the lifter drive shaft as shown the lifter cable will become slack when you move the lifter motor unit F08 303 12 9 Remove the five screws 12 and detach the lifter motor unit 13 F08 303 13 10 11 12 12 13 ...

Page 523: ...e lifter cable on the pulley 5 of the lifter drive shaft then wind the cable along the groove of the pulley about 1 5 times by hand At this time try to keep the lifter cable taut i e the long screwdrivers used to hold the lifter in position are lifted slightly by the lifter cable 5 Secure the pulley to the lifter drive shaft with two set screws 6 6 Secure all pulleys you have removed to the lifter...

Page 524: ...isconnect the two connectors 1 and remove the five screws 2 3 Remove the deck pickup unit 3 F08 304 01 When mounting the deck pickup unit 3 be sure to se cure the three screws shown F08 304 02 3 4 2 Removing the Deck Pickup Roller 1 Remove the deck pickup unit See p 8 38P 2 Turn over the deck pickup unit and re move the two resin rings 1 then de tach the deck pickup rollers 2 F08 304 03 1 2 2 2 3 ...

Page 525: ...04 When mounting the deck pickup roller 4 at the rear of the machine be sure that the marking 5 found on the side of the roller and the marking 6 found on the col lar silver are toward the rear of the ma chine F08 304 05 3 4 4 Removing the Deck Pickup Feed Roller 1 Remove the deck pickup unit See p 8 38P 2 Turn over the deck pickup unit 3 Remove the resin ring 1 and detach the deck pickup feed rol...

Page 526: ...t the belt pulley 2 is toward the front of the machine The pickup feed roller rubber may be attached to the pickup feed roller shaft in any orien tation F08 304 07 3 4 6 Removing the Deck Separation Roller 1 Disconnect the deck from the host ma chine then remove the two screws 1 and detach the separation roller support plate 2 2 Remove the joint and detach the deck separation roller 3 F08 304 08 F...

Page 527: ... light and all this is a general characteristic of urethane sponge not affecting its quality Multiple parts do not exist dis tinguished by color 3 4 7 Adjusting the Pressure of the Deck Separation Roller If pickup failure or double feeding occurs when the deck is used adjust the position of the pressure sponge of the deck separation roller If pickup failure occurs move the spring in the direction ...

Page 528: ...ke note of the positions of the two fix ing screws 2 of the solenoid with refer ence to the index on the support plate be fore removing the deck pickup roller releas ing solenoid 1 from the support plate or mark the position of the solenoid on the support plate with a scriber If the solenoid is to be mounted on its own be sure to locate it in its initial posi tion F08 304 11 1 2 ...

Page 529: ...from its host ma chine then remove the six screws and detach the rear cover 2 Disconnect the eight connectors 1 and remove the four screws 2 then detach the deck driver PCB 3 F08 305 01 3 5 2 Removing the Open Switch PCB 1 Disconnect the deck from the host ma chine and push the latch plate 2 of the compartment 1 with your finger to open the compartment F08 305 02 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 rear 2 1 ...

Page 530: ...move the three screws 3 and dis connect the connector 4 then detach the front upper cover 5 F08 305 03 3 Remove the two screws 6 and detach the open switch PCB 7 When mounting the upper front cover be sure to avoid biting the harness by the open switch PCB or forgetting to connect the connectors F08 305 04 3 4 5 7 6 ...

Page 532: ...n sort w o offset Ascent descent by coil springs descent by weight of paper Shift by motor A3 A4 A4R A5R B4 B5 B5R 11 17 LTR LTR R LGL STMT R postcard transparency 64 to 200 g m2 By group 55 mm Sort 500 sheets paper of 64 g m2 Non sort 250 sheets paper of 64 g m2 Sort 50 mm or less direction of delivery 20 mm or more direction of shift stack to stack stack 5 mm or less direction of shift within st...

Page 533: ...0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY 9 2 P 1 Tray 2 Limit sensor front 3 Limit sensor rear 4 Tray drive unit 5 Shift tray driver PCB 2 Names of Parts 10 5 1 7 3 8 2 6 9 4 F09 201 01 6 HP sensor front 7 HP sensor rear 8 Light blocking plate 9 Tray paper sensor 10 Delivery unit ...

Page 534: ...hift tray driver PCB drives the shift motor in response to the shift control signal from the host machine and provides the host machine with various sensor signals for con trol of shifting operations F09 301 01 Shift tray driver PCB Motor drive circuit J102 J101 J201 J202 Motor control signal Sensor signal A24V A5V To host machine To host machine Various sensors Shift motor M ...

Page 535: ...P sensor rear PS102 J103 3 2 1 STHPL When the tray is in HP at front 1 When the tray is in HP at rear 1 5V Tray paper sensor PS103 J104 6 5 4 SPEXIST J205 N C N C 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 When paper is put on tray 0 5V 5V Limit sensor rear PS104 J104 3 2 1 SPCFULL When paper exceeds limit 0 When paper exceeds limit 0 24 V on SDCM1 moves tray to front 24 V on SDCM2 moves tray to rear Limit sensor front PS10...

Page 536: ...ay at the front and the rear is controlled by the HP sensors mounted to the front and the rear F09 401 01 4 2 Stacking The machine s tray is supported by coil springs and the tray moves down under the weight of the paper deposited on it The stack is monitored by limit sensors reflecting type photosensors when the stack reaches a specific height the shift tray driver PCB sends the FULL signal to th...

Page 537: ... paper on the tray is detected by the tray paper sensor mounted on the tray F09 403 01 4 4 Delivery The sheets delivered by the host machine is moved through the delivery unit and then de posited on the tray The delivery unit assembly is driven by the delivery motor through gears of the host machine s delivery assembly F09 404 01 Tray paper sensor PS103 ...

Page 538: ...g Adjustments 1 Turn off the host machine s main power switch 2 Remove the delivery unit from the main machine Keep the tray connected to the host machine 3 Temporarily fix the limit sensor font rear at the point farthest from the paper 4 Place a stack of 60 mm in height on the shift tray where either of the limit sensors can detect it 5 Turn off the host machine s main power switch then select ST...

Page 539: ...sition of the limit senor front rear be sure to start at the point farthest from the paper moving closer to the sensor 2 The grounding wire terminal of the limit sensor front rear must be level in relation to the sensor as shown in addition make sure that the bend of the terminal must face downward F09 501 02 Grounding wire terminal ...

Page 540: ...ated the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it 3 The screws must be identified by type length diameter and location 4 The mounting screw of the grounding wire and the varistors is equipped with a toothed washer to ensure electrical continuity They must not be left out when fitting the screws 5 As a rule the machine must not be operated with any of its parts removed...

Page 541: ...river PCB 1 Remove the shift tray from the machine 2 Release the two retaining claws 1 and detach the cable retaining plate 2 F09 601 01 3 Remove the two screws 3 and detach the two limit sensors 4 and the two grounding wires 4 Free the cable of the limit sensor from the cable clamp 5 and disconnect the connector 6 F09 601 02 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 ...

Page 542: ...n detach the tray drive assembly 9 F09 601 03 6 Pull off the shaft 10 from the tray drive assembly and remove the three screws 11 then detach the shielding cover 12 F09 601 04 7 Remove the four screws 13 and de tach the shift tray driver PCB 14 Points to Note When Mounting Be sure to adjust the position of the limit sensor front rear see 5 1 Adjusting the Limit sensor Position F09 601 05 7 8 8 9 1...

Page 543: ...Tray Drive Unit 1 Perform steps 1 through 6 to detach the shift tray driver PCB 2 Remove the two screws 15 and dis connect the connector 16 then detach the tray drive unit 17 Points to Note When Mounting Be sure to adjust the position of the limit sensor front rear see 5 1 Adjusting the Limit sensor Position F09 602 01 15 16 17 ...

Page 545: ...nit 1 2 2 2T 3 Making Checks on the Printer Unit 2 2 2 3T 4 Making Checks on the Reader Unit 2 4T CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 1 Image Adjustments 3 1T 1 1 Standards of Image Position 3 1T 1 2 Checking the Image Position 3 2T 1 3 Adjusting the Left Right Image Margin 3 2T 1 3 1 Cassette 3 4 3 2T 1 3 2 Left Right Front Deck 3 3T 1 3 3 Manual Feed Tray 3 3T 1 3 4 Duplex Feeding Unit 3 4T 1 3 ...

Page 546: ... the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid SL7 3 18T 4 13 Adjusting the Position of the Re versing Flapper Solenoid SL8 3 18T 4 14 Adjusting the Position of the Fixing Web Solenoid SL9 3 19T 4 14 1 New Fixing Web 3 19T 4 14 2 Existing Fixing Web 3 19T 4 15 Position of the Side Paper Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid 3 20T 4 16 Attaching the Timing Belt of the Manual Feed Tray Assembly 3 20T 4 17 Attaching...

Page 547: ... Image Faults 4 4T 3 Troubleshooting Image Faults 4 5T 3 1 The image is too light halftone 4 5T 3 2 The print is too light including solid black area 4 6T 3 3 The print is too light overall ap preciably 4 6T 3 4 The print has uneven density darker at front 4 7T 3 5 The print has uneven density lighter at front 4 7T 3 6 The print is foggy overall 4 8T 3 7 The print if foggy vertically 4 9T 3 8 The ...

Page 548: ... 4 2 1 AC power is absent 4 38T 4 2 2 DC power is absent 4 38T 4 2 3 Pickup fails 4 39T 4 2 4 The lifter fails to move up pickup from front deck 4 41T 4 2 5 The lifter fails to move up pickup from cassette 4 41T 4 2 6 Pickup fails manual feed 4 42T 4 2 7 The vertical path roller fails to rotate 4 43T 4 2 8 The registration roller fails to operate 4 44T 4 2 9 The No 1 mirror mount fails to operate ...

Page 549: ...nd Others 4 70T 6 6 1 Reader Unit 4 71T 6 6 2 Printer Unit 4 71T 6 7 PCBs 4 72T 6 7 1 Reader Unit 4 73T 6 7 2 Printer unit 4 73T 6 8 Variable Resistors VR Light Emitting Diodes LED and Check Pins by PCB 4 74T 6 8 1 Main Controller PCB 4 74T 6 8 2 DC Controller PCB 4 75T 6 8 3 Reader Controller PCB 4 76T 6 8 4 Power Supply PCB 4 76T 6 8 5 HVT PCB 4 77T 6 8 6 Drum Heater Control PCB 4 77T 7 Upgradin...

Page 550: ...T 1 1 Outline 5 1T 1 2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections 5 2T 1 3 Ending Service Mode 5 3T 1 4 Backing Up Service Mode 5 3T 1 5 Basic Operations 5 4T 1 5 1 Initial Screen 5 4T 1 5 2 Level 1 Level 2 Screen 5 4T 1 5 3 Level 3 Screen 5 5T 2 DISPLAY control display mode 5 6T 2 1 COPIER 5 6T 2 2 FEEDER 5 19T 3 I O I O display mode 5 20T 3 1 DC CON 5 21T 3 2 R CON 5 29T 3 3 MN CON 5 31T 3 4 FE...

Page 552: ...re a specific level of machine performance Once they fail the consequences are likely to be consider able Whenever possible schedule the replacement to coincide with a scheduled visit to the user s 1 1 Guide to Timing of Replacement You can check the timing of replacement for periodically replaced parts in service mode COPIER COUNTER PRDC 1 1 2 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have parts that ...

Page 553: ...ng wire FF5 6883 1 500 000 Strengthened polish cleaner 1 type blue 6 Transfer charging wire FF5 6884 1 500 000 Strengthened polish cleaner 2 type blue 7 Separation charging wire FF5 3090 1 500 000 cleaner 8 Pre transfer charging wire FF5 3090 1 500 000 cleaner 9 Main thermistor FH7 7529 1 500 000 10 Sub thermistor FG5 8812 1 500 000 11 Ozone filter FB5 5570 1 500 000 12 Thermal switch FH7 7154 1 1...

Page 554: ...e machine are likely to require replacement because of wear or damage once or more over the period of machine warranty Replace them when they fail 2 1 Guide to Timing of Replacement You can check the timing of replacement for durables in service mode COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 2 2 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have parts that are classified as consumables or durables ...

Page 555: ...7 Pre separation charging FA4 1867 1 500 000 assembly scraper 8 Fixing upper roller FB4 3690 1 500 000 9 Fixing lower roller FB5 3619 1 500 000 10 Fixing web FY1 1157 1 500 000 11 Insulating bush front rear FB5 3613 2 500 000 Replace simultaneously with fixing upper roller 12 Delivery upper separation claw FB5 3625 6 500 000 13 Delivery lower separation claw FA2 9037 2 1 000 000 14 Developing cyli...

Page 556: ... CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 1 5 T 2 4 Side Paper Deck As of May 2001 No Part name Part No Q ty Life Remarks 1 Pickup roller front FF5 1220 1 250 000 2 Pickup roller rear FF5 1221 1 250 000 3 Feeding roller FF5 9779 1 250 000 4 Separation roller FB2 7777 1 250 000 T01 204 01 ...

Page 557: ...person in charge check the general condition 2 Record the counter reading check faulty prints 3 Make test prints and check the following 1 image density against standards 2 white background for soiling 3 characters for clarity 4 margin 5 fixing registration for displacement and back for soiling Then check the margins against standards single sided for leading edge 4 0 1 5 1 0 mm for left right 2 5...

Page 558: ...r charging wire cleaner use a regular type brown holder 3 If you have replaced the primary transfer charging wire be sure to execute wire clean ing in service mode T01 301 01 5 Clean the optical system with a blower brush if the dirt is excessive use alcohol 1 No 1 2 3 mirror 2 Dust proof glass 3 Scanning reflecting plate 4 Standard white plate 6 Perform the following for the optical path 1 For th...

Page 559: ...Clean the cleaning assembly side scraper 13 Clean the copyboard glass and the reading glass 14 Make test prints 15 Make sample prints 16 Check the operation of the leakage breaker While the power switch is on press the test switch of the leakage breaker to see that it oper ates normally i e the lever shifts to OFF and the power is cut If it does not operate normally replace it and make a check onc...

Page 560: ...r Scanner cable Only at fist 250 000 inspection adjustment Optical Scanner rail Silicone oil path FY9 6011 Copyboard glass No 1 through No 3 mirrors Scanner reflecting plate 4 2 Printer Unit Clean Replace Lubricate Adjust Inspect Intervals Unit Part Upon every every every every Remarks installation 250 000 500 000 750 0001 000 000 Externals Ozone filter controls FM3 Dust proofing Remove dust filte...

Page 561: ...ansfer trans neously fer separation Grid wire primary Charging assembly shielding plate each charging assembly Roller electrode Primary anti stray toner sheet Photosensi Photosensitive Use alcohol tive drum drum and drum cleaning pow der CK 0429 for in structions see 6 Cleaning the Photo sensitive Drum Electrode for Clean with slip ring of alcohol 1 electrode drum heater 2 protruding wall of elec ...

Page 562: ... 000 750 0001 000 000 Developing Anti stray assembly toner sheet Cleaner Side scraper Toner dish rear front Fixing Inlet guide assembly Web Oil dish Thermistor Sub thermistor Thermal switch Delivery Separation assembly claw upper lower Waste toner Waste toner Inspect case collection box and remove area toner Pickup Transfer guide feeding Registration assembly roller upper lower Feeding belt Feedin...

Page 563: ...yboard glass Clean it with a blower brush if dirt is excessive dry wipe with lint free paper No 1 through No 3 mirrors Scanning lamp Feeding assembly Clean with a moist cloth see Note 1 Developing assembly base Clean with a moist cloth see Note 1 Note 1 Do to leave traces of water 5 Points to Note for Periodical Servicing Unless otherwise instructed clean with lint free paper and alcohol Make a th...

Page 564: ...aper 4 While butting the lint free paper rela tively strongly against the photosensi tive drum wipe the surface of the drum from the front to the rear and from the rear to the front F01 601 01 Keep the widths of cleaning to 5 to 10 cm in the peripheral direction of the drum Move the lint free paper back and forth 15 to 20 times over a single area Forcing the lint free paper will not affect the lif...

Page 566: ... Pre Checks Clean the following 1 Primary charging assembly grid wire 2 Primary charging wire 3 Pre transfer charging wire 4 Transfer charging wire If a fault is found on printer images If a fault is found on copy images Output Conditions F value 5 potential control ON Perform 2 Making Checks on the Printer Unit Perform 4 Making Checks on the Reader Unit YES NO Are the test prints normal Points to...

Page 567: ...otential control system 3 Photosensitive drum Check the following and replace them if necessary 1 Laser for output 2 Potential control system 3 Photosensitive drum Check the primary charging system and the potential control system if normal replace the photosensitive drum Clean the following also check for foreign matter 1 Dust proofing glass 2 Charging assemblies 1 If there still is a difference ...

Page 568: ...he following readings in service mode COPIER DISPLAY DPOT VL2M for copier image COPIER DISPLAY DPOT VL2M P for printer image Check the following readings in service mode COPIER DISPLAY DPOT VDM for copier image COPIER DISPLAY DPOT VDM P for printer image Check the following and replace them if necessary 1 Laser for output 2 Potential control system 3 Photosensitive drum Check the following and rep...

Page 569: ... front and rear Is the density of gray scale No 1 solid black too low light Make a copy of the NA3 Chart in text mode Is the white background foggy Is the white background foggy Is the density of gray scale No 8 halftone different If it is too dark If it is too light Perform the instructions under Checking for Fogging on the printer side YES NO NO YES Make a copy of the NA3 Chart in AE mode Is the...

Page 571: ...ents 1 1 Standards of Image Position The image margin non image width of a print made in Direct must be as follows F03 101 01 Image Leading Edge Margin F03 101 02 Left Right Image Margin F03 101 04 Left Right Non Image Width F03 101 03 Leading Edge Non Image Width 1 5mm 1 0mm 4 0 2 5 1 5mm 0 2 4 6 8 10 1 5mm 1 0mm 4 0 2 5 1 5mm 0 2 4 6 8 10 ...

Page 572: ...t right image margin registration 2 Adjusting the image leading edge margin registration 3 Adjusting the left right non image width CCD read start position 4 Leading edge non image width scanner image leading edge position 1 3 Adjusting the Left Right Image Margin 1 3 1 Cassette 3 4 1 Loosen the two fixing screws 1 found on the left and the right of the cassette F03 103 01 2 Remove the paper size ...

Page 573: ... 1 Loosen the four screws 2 and the two fixing screws 3 of the cassette front cover 1 F03 103 03 2 Move the cassette guide assembly front 4 to the front or the rear to make adjustments F03 103 04 1 3 3 Manual Feed Tray 1 Loosen the two mounting screws 1 of the manual feed tray and adjust the po sition of the manual feed tray F03 103 05 1 2 2 3 2 3 4 1 ...

Page 574: ...06 1 3 5 Side Paper Deck 1 Slide out the compartment and turn the two screws to adjust the position of the latch plate of the deck open solenoid At this time use the index on the latch plate as a guide F03 103 07 2 5 2 0mm Increasing the ADJ REFE setting An increase by 10 will increase the margin by 1 mm Decreasing the ADJ REFE setting A decrease by 10 will ecrease the margin by 1 mm 0 2 4 6 8 10 ...

Page 575: ...t Non Image Width 1 Adjust the non image width in service mode so that it is as indicated COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ Y F03 105 01 Edge of paper Decreasing the REGIST setting A decrease by 10 will increase the margin by 1 mm Increasing the REGIST setting An increase by 10 will decrease the margin by 1 mm 2 5mm 2 0 Edge of image Increasing the ADJ Y setting An increase by 10 will increase the non imag...

Page 576: ... Adjusting the Leading Edge Non Image Width 1 Adjust the non image width in service mode so that it is as indicated COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ X F03 106 01 Image leading edge Decreasing the ADJ X setting A decrease by 10 will decrease the width by 1 mm Increasing the ADJ X setting An increase by 10 will increase the width by 1 mm ...

Page 577: ...MENTS 3 7 T 2 Scanning System 2 1 Replacing the Scanner Drive Cable See the Reader Manual Chap 2 5 Disassembly Assembly 2 2 Adjusting the Position of the Scanner Mirror Base See the Reader Manual Chap 2 5 Disassembly Assembly 2 3 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp See the Reader Manual Chap 2 5 Disassembly Assembly ...

Page 578: ...Chap 4 7 8 Charging Wire 3 3 Mounting the Drum Cleaning Blade See the Printer Manual Chap 4 7 11 Drum Cleaner 3 4 Mounting the Developing Blade See the Printer Manual Chap 4 7 9 Developing Assembly 3 5 Replacing the Potential Sensor Potential Control PCB See the Printer Unit Chap 4 7 4 Potential Sensor Assembly 1 The potential sensor and the potential control PCB are adjusted as a single unit be s...

Page 579: ...n mounting the pickup roller 1 to the pickup assembly make sure that the round marking 2 found on the side of the roller and the round marking 3 found on the collar gold colored are toward the front of the machine F03 401 01 The collar of the pickup roller used at the rear of the machine is silver colored When mounting the pickup roller 4 to the pickup assembly make sure that the round mark ing 5 ...

Page 580: ...t is oriented as follows Cassette 3 4 Right Pickup Assembly Left Deck Pickup Assembly F03 402 01 4 3 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Deck Cassette Pickup Assembly When mounting the feeding roller assembly of the deck cassette pickup assembly be sure the belt pulley 2 is toward the front of the machine F03 403 01 Wider groove Narrower groove front of machine rear of machine Wider groove Na...

Page 581: ...ounting the pickup roller 1 to the pickup assembly be sure that the round mark ing 2 found on the collar silver colored is toward the front of the machine 1 Pickup roller 2 Marking on collar F03 404 01 The collar on the pickup roller found at the rear of the machine is gold colored When mounting the pickup roller 4 to the pickup assembly be sure that the round mark ing 5 found on the side of the r...

Page 582: ...on of the Feeding Roller of the Side Paper Deck When mounting the feeding roller assembly 1 to the side paper deck be sure that the belt pulley 2 is toward the front of the machine When mounting the feeding roller 3 to the feeding roller shaft 4 be sure that the round marking 5 is toward the rear of the ma chine F03 405 01 front 3 4 2 1 5 ...

Page 583: ...he Deck Cassette If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup change the position of the pres sure spring of the separation roller If double feeding occurs move the hook of the spring in the direction of B If pickup failure occurs move the hook of the spring in the direction of A 1 Feeding roller 2 Separation roller 3 Pressure lever 4 Pressure spring F03 406 01 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 584: ...curs during pickup adjust the position of the pres sure spring of the separation roller 1 Remove the right upper cover 2 Remove the upper guide 1 F03 407 01 If double feeding occurs remove the mounting screw 2 and lower the mounting base 3 then tighten the mounting screw 2 in hole A If pickup failure occurs remove the mounting screw 2 and raise the mounting base 3 then tighten the mounting screw 2...

Page 585: ...ANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 3 15 T 4 8 Adjusting the Fixing Inlet Guide Solenoid SL1 Adjust the position of the solenoid using the two screws 1 so that the guide will be posi tioned as indicated when the solenoid turns on F03 408 01 3 2mm Upper roller Lower roller Solenoid Inlet guide 9 5mm 12 7mm 1 ...

Page 586: ...ENTS 3 16 T 4 9 Adjusting the Position of the Pickup Solenoid SL3 SL4 of the Cassette 3 4 Adjust the position of the solenoid using the two screws 3 so that the distance from the bottom of the pickup assembly to A of the roller arm is 36 0 5 mm when 1 and 2 are op erated F03 409 01 1 2 1 2 A View from A 36 0 5mm 3 ...

Page 587: ...the position of the mounting screw 2 using the screw 2 so that the drive lever 1 is pushed fully when the solenoid turns on i e when the plunger is drawn F03 410 01 4 11 Adjusting the Position of the Right Deck Pickup Solenoid SL6 Adjust the position of the solenoid so that the left edge of the arm 2 is 57 2 0 5 mm from the center of hole A of the solenoid mounting base F03 411 01 2 1 A 57 2 0 5mm...

Page 588: ...f its position with reference to the fixing screw 2 of the solenoid Or mark the position for the solenoid by drawing a line on the support plate with a scriber When mounting the solenoid on its own be sure to secure it in its original position F03 412 01 4 13 Adjusting the Position of the Reversing Flapper Solenoid SL8 1 Adjust the potion of the solenoid so that the drive lever 1 is pushed fully w...

Page 589: ...r the solenoid using the screw 2 so that the distance of travel of the drive lever 1 is 8 6 mm F03 414 01 4 14 2 Existing Fixing Web Before removing the solenoid take note of the position A of the drive lever when the solenoid turns on After replacing the solenoid adjust its position using the screw 2 so that the drive lever 1 will be positioned as it was before replacement when the solenoid turns...

Page 590: ...g screws 2 of the solenoid with reference to the index on the support plate Or draw a line on the support plate so that it will serve as a reference when positioning the solenoid When mounting the solenoid on its own be sure to secure it in its original position F03 415 01 4 16 Attaching the Timing Belt of the Manual Feed Tray Assembly 1 Butt the rack plate 1 of the manual feed tray against A open...

Page 591: ... 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 3 21 T 4 17 Attaching the Drive Belt Attach the drive belt on the pulley and the rollers as indicated F03 417 01 Main drive belt Paper feed drive belt ...

Page 592: ... outside Be sure it is parallel to the holder 5 2 Position of the Fixing Inlet Guide Points to Note When Making Adjustments in the Field 1 For the position of the inlet guide see the instructions under 4 8 i e adjusting the posi tion of the fixing inlet guide solenoid SL1 2 The inlet guide will move down when the solenoid SL1 turns on 3 The difference in the height of the inlet guide between front...

Page 593: ...ode to discharge the paper COPIER FUNCTION FIXING NIP CHK F03 503 01 5 3 2 Standards 1 Measure the width of a b and c a and c are points 10 mm from both edges of paper 2 Check to see if the measurements are as indicated Otherwise make the adjust ment under c Be sure that both upper and lower rollers are fully heated when taking measurements 5 3 3 Making Adjustments 1 Slide the fixing assembly out ...

Page 594: ...er Exposure System 6 1 When Replacing the Scanner Unit If the temperature of the fixing assembly is 150 C or higher when the scanner unit is re placed force potential control in service mode 1 Make the following selections in service mode then enter 1 and press OK COPIER FUNCTION DPC DPC 2 Turn off and then on the main power switch ...

Page 595: ...dated automatically record them on the service label COPIER ADJUST CCD all items 7 2 When Replacing the Reader controller PCB 1 Print out the data of user mode service mode 2 Replace the reader controller PCB 3 Remove the EEPROM 1 pc from the existing PCB and mount it to the new PCB 4 After assembling the machine connect the power plug to the power outlet and turn on the main power switch 5 Check ...

Page 596: ...holding down the 2 and 8 keys in the control panel at the same time turn on the main power switch 5 Return the data 7 4 When Replacing the HDD Unit When replacing the HDD unit be sure to keep the following in mind 1 Take appropriate measures against static charges 2 Keep the HDD unit protected from impact 1 Replace the HDD unit 2 After assembling the machine connect the power plug to the power out...

Page 597: ...e sure that the following service mode settings are the same as the data ob tained before replacing the PCB COPIER ADJUST LASER all items COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP all items except D HV DE COPIER ADJUST DENS all items COPIER ADJUST BLANK all items COPIER ADJUST V CONT all items COPIER ADJUST HV PRI all items COPIER ADJUST HV TR all items except D PRE TR and D HV TR COPIER ADJUST HV SP all items except...

Page 598: ...oltage PCB 1 Replace the high voltage PCB 2 After assembling the machine connect the power plug and turn on the main power switch 3 Enter the values recorded on the label attached to the new high voltage PCB in the fol lowing service mode items COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP HVT DE COPIER ADJUST HV TR HVT TR COPIER ADJUST HV TR H PRE TR COPIER ADJUST HV SP HVT SP ...

Page 599: ...l Mechanism The potential control system may be checked by disabling the auto control mechanism referred to hereafter as non auto control mode If improvements are noted in the images made in non auto control mode the potential measurement unit and the DC controller PCB may be suspected Further non auto control mode may also be made use of as an emergency measure against an error in the auto contro...

Page 600: ...od 1 for checking the level shift circuit of the DC controller PCB 2 Method 2 for checking the potential measurement circuit 8 3 1 Method 1 1 Turn off the main power switch 2 Remove the rear upper cover 3 Short CP106 1 and CP105 2 on the DC controller PCB using a cable whose both ends are equipped with an alligator clip or a probe When shorting CP106 and CP105 be sure to keep the shorting tool awa...

Page 601: ...r 4 pin 5 connected to the DC controller PCB F03 803 03 7 Put the pickup feeding unit back into its initial position and fit the door switch tool in the door switch assembly then turn on the main power switch 8 Make the following selections in service mode and check to find out that the reading during initial rotation is between 0 and 30 COPIER DISPLAY DPOT DPOT K If the reading is not between 0 a...

Page 602: ...that the machine will be in non auto control mode 2 Turn off the main power switch 3 Remove the potential sensor from the machine 4 Connect the connector of the potential controller to the connector on the machine side 5 Fit the electrode FY9 3012 2 designed for checking potential sensors to the potential sensor 1 F03 803 04 When fitting the electrode to the potential sensor be sure to keep the ma...

Page 603: ...ode and check to make user that the reading during initial rotation is between 0 and 30 COPIER DISPLAY DPOT DPOT K REF 1 If the reading is as indicated for method 1 but is not so for method 2 suspect dirt on the or and a fault in the potential measurement unit 2 If the reading is as indicated for both method 1 and method 2 the sig nal paths and the operations from the potential sensor unit to the ...

Page 605: ...e better A Is the laser output a limit value YES Replace the photosensitive drum If the problem is not corrected go to the checking the laser output Make the following selections in service mode level of current of the primary charging assembly COPIER DISPLAY HV STS PRIMARY Convert the reading mA indicated during printing into a control voltage with reference to 8 5 Potential Control Conversion Ta...

Page 606: ...N BODY PO CNT 0 Measure the voltage TR CNT during printing of J102A 12 on the DC controller PCB 1 Check the transfer charging assembly for leakage 2 Make the following selections in service mode and try changing the setting COPIER OPTION BODY FUZZY 3 Try replacing paper Make the following selections in service mode level of current of transfer charging Convert the reading µA during printing into a...

Page 607: ... 412 62 3 55 1 303 41 22 409 58 3 60 1 295 45 24 407 55 3 65 1 286 48 26 404 51 3 70 1 277 52 28 401 47 3 75 1 268 56 30 398 43 3 80 1 260 60 33 396 40 3 85 1 251 63 35 393 36 3 90 1 242 67 37 390 32 3 95 1 233 71 39 387 28 4 00 1 225 75 41 385 25 4 05 1 216 78 43 382 21 4 10 1 207 82 45 379 17 4 15 1 198 86 47 376 13 4 20 1 190 90 49 374 10 4 25 1 181 93 51 371 6 4 30 1 172 97 53 368 2 4 35 1 163...

Page 608: ... 5 60 945 195 107 297 95 5 65 936 198 109 294 98 5 70 927 202 111 291 102 5 75 918 206 113 288 106 5 80 910 210 115 286 110 5 85 901 213 117 283 113 5 90 892 217 119 280 117 5 95 883 221 121 277 121 6 00 875 225 123 275 125 6 05 866 228 125 272 128 6 10 857 232 127 269 132 6 15 848 236 129 266 136 6 20 840 240 132 264 140 6 25 831 243 134 261 143 6 30 822 247 136 258 147 6 35 813 251 138 255 151 6...

Page 609: ... 241 7 60 595 345 189 187 245 7 65 586 348 191 184 248 7 70 577 352 193 181 252 7 75 568 356 195 178 256 7 80 560 360 198 176 260 7 85 551 363 200 173 263 7 90 542 367 202 170 267 7 95 533 371 204 167 271 8 00 525 375 206 165 275 8 05 516 378 208 162 278 8 10 507 382 210 159 282 8 15 498 386 212 156 286 8 20 490 390 214 154 290 8 25 481 393 216 151 293 8 30 472 397 218 148 297 8 35 463 401 220 145...

Page 610: ... 9 60 245 495 272 77 395 9 65 236 498 274 74 398 9 70 227 502 276 71 402 9 75 218 506 278 68 406 9 80 210 510 280 66 410 9 85 201 513 282 63 413 9 90 192 517 284 60 417 9 95 183 521 286 57 421 10 00 175 525 288 55 425 10 05 166 528 290 52 428 10 10 157 532 292 49 432 10 15 148 536 294 46 436 10 20 140 540 297 44 440 10 25 131 543 299 41 443 10 30 122 547 301 38 447 10 35 113 551 303 35 451 10 40 1...

Page 611: ...ind however that this is no more than a temporary measure used until the replacement of the potential sensor 1 COPIER OPTION TEMPO F POT SW If the potential sensor has gone out of order and transfer separation faults occur as a re sult enter 1 2 COPIER OPTION TEMPO F POT D The above service mode item must be set to 1 0 if the user mainly uses originals with a low image ratio text oriented default ...

Page 612: ...ide humidity data B2 6 Compare data A and data B if the difference is not as indicated replace the environment sensor difference between data A1 and data B1 0 5 difference between data A2 and data B2 0 20 7 Press the Reset key twice and turn off the main power switch 8 Detach the environment sensor tool and attach the environment sensor The environment sensor tool FY9 3014 is adjusted at the facto...

Page 613: ...e and select I O 2 Bring up the I O address to check and make checks as indicated Turning on and off the sensor can turn on the machine s motors Take full care 10 3 Check List Guide to Connector No D DC controller PCB R reader controller PCB Reader Unit service mode COPIER I O R CON Sensor Connector No Checks I O Voltage I O address display display PS39 R J5012 2 Move the No 1 mirror base Light bl...

Page 614: ...S9 D J115 A14 Open and close the left deck Left deck Open 0 0V Left deck open closes sensor IO P03 12 Closed 1 5V PS10 D J115 A5 Put paper in the left deck Paper Present 1 5V Left deck lifter sensor IO P03 3 Absent 0 0V PS11 D J115 A8 Put paper in the left deck Paper Present 1 5V Left deck paper sensor IO P01 9 Absent 0 0V PS12 D J115 A2 Put paper in the left deck Paper Present 1 5V Left deck limi...

Page 615: ...ht cover and move the Light blocking Present 1 5V Vertical path 4 paper sensor IO P01 6 sensor lever plate Absent 0 0V PS28 D J113 B2 Put paper over the point of Paper Present 1 5V Laser write start sensor IO P02 8 detection Absent 0 0V PS29 D J106 A9 Put paper over the point of Paper Present 1 5V Registration paper sensor IO P01 1 detection Absent 0 0V PS30 D J107 B13 Put paper over the point of ...

Page 616: ...jam sensor IO P06 2 detection Absent 0 0V PS47 D J115 B2 Remove the deck from the machine Light blocking Present 1 5V Right deck level upper sensor IO P05 8 and move the sensor lever plate Absent 0 0V PS48 D J115 B5 Remove the deck from the machine Light blocking Present 1 5V Right deck level lower sensor IO P05 12 and move the sensor lever plate Absent 0 0V PS49 D J115 B8 Remove the deck from the...

Page 618: ...mptoms Try to find out where the problem is caused by the originals or the machine 1 The copy density is optimum when it is as indicated by the index 5 1 2 An original with a reddish background prevents good contrast e g red slips 3 Check the original for density Memo A diazo copy used as an original or an original with transparency tends to produce prints that are likely to be judged foggy An ori...

Page 619: ...aper will adversely affect transfer generating poor images Advise him her on the correct method of storing paper 1 7 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts Check with the Scheduled Servicing Chart and the Periodically Replaced Parts Table if any part has reached the end of its life replace it 1 8 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure If the prints have uneven density difference in density between fro...

Page 621: ...mage is too light halftone AE adjustment 1 Make prints in AE mode Is the density normal YES End Developing assembly 2 Are the rolls of the developing assembly in firm contact with the photo sensitive drum YES Check to see if the surface of the developing cylinder is coated with an even layer of toner NO Check to find out if the developing assembly locking unit is mounted correctly ...

Page 622: ...ing unit is mounted correctly YES Check the control system of the developing bias Pre transfer charging assembly 3 Is the pre transfer charging assembly fitted securely NO Fit the charging assembly securely Transfer faults 4 Is the transfer separation charging assembly fitted securely NO Fit the transfer separation charging assembly securely 5 Try changing the setting of the following in service m...

Page 623: ...ce the pre exposure lamp 2 Replace the DC controller PCB Developing assembly 2 Are the rolls of the developing assembly in firm contact with the photo sensitive drum NO Check to see if the developing assembly locking unit is mounted correctly 3 Is the surface of the developing cylinder coated with an even layer of toner NO 1 Clean the edge of the blade of the developing assembly dry wip ing 2 Clea...

Page 624: ...cks ac cording to the instructions for the potential control mechanism in Chapter 3 Standards and Adjustments Photosensitive drum cleaner unit 2 Is the cleaning blade mounted correctly NO Mount the cleaning blade correctly Pre exposure lamp DC controller PCB 3 Is the pre exposure lamp on during printing NO 1 Replace the pre exposure lamp 2 Replace the DC controller PCB Developing assembly 4 Are th...

Page 625: ...ow ing 1 Fixing assembly upper roller for dirt 2 Web for dirt Potential control system 3 Set 0 to the following in service mode to turn off potential control COPIER OPTION BODY PC CNT Is the problem corrected YES The problem is in the potential control system Make checks for the potential control system in Chapter 3 Standards and Adjust ments Primary charging assembly 4 Clean the primary charging ...

Page 626: ...upper roller for scratches and black lines 2 Web for dirt 3 Thermistor and separation claw for dirt and reciprocating opera tion Primary charging assembly 4 Clean the primary charging assembly Is the problem corrected YES End Photosensitive drum cleaner unit 5 Is there paper or foreign matter trapped in the cleaning blade assembly YES Remove the foreign matter and clean the cleaning blade and the ...

Page 627: ...s the fixing assembly and check the image Is it normal YES The cause is in a process after the fixing system Check the follow ing 1 Fixing assembly upper roller for offset Photosensitive drum 3 Are there scratches in the peripheral direction of the surface of the pho tosensitive drum that match the image YES Find out the cause of the scratches and replace the photosensitive drum Developing assembl...

Page 628: ...problem occur at even intervals YES Clean each charging wire Developing assembly Photosensitive drum 3 Does the problem occur at intervals of about 43 mm YES Check the developing assembly 1 Clean the developing rolls 2 Dry wipe the surface of the developing cylinder 3 If scratches are found on the surface of the developing cylinder re place the developing cylinder NO Check the photosensitive drum ...

Page 629: ...eck the developing assembly for leakage of toner Drum cleaner 2 Is the paper feeding assembly soiled with toner YES 1 Clean the feeding assembly 2 Check the drum cleaner assembly for leakage of waste toner Fixing assembly 3 Is the fixing assembly lower roller soiled YES 1 Clean the fixing assembly lower roller 2 Clean the fixing assembly inlet guide 3 Check the fixing upper roller and the web for ...

Page 630: ...ollowing and advise the user a Set the source of paper cassette deck to Heavy Additional Function common settings store paper type source of paper Heavy b Advise the user to always use the selected source of paper after depositing thick paper whenever using thick paper 2 Is the paper of a recommended type NO Try using recommended paper If the results are good advise the user to use recommended pap...

Page 631: ...riginal correctly Pickup assembly 2 Make prints using the following source of paper Is the displaced lead ing edge different 1 Let right front deck 2 Cassettes 3 Side paper deck 4 Duplex feeding assembly double sided print YES Check the source of paper in question for the following 1 Life of each roller 2 Paper lint on each roller 3 Dirt on the paper path Registration clutch Registration roller 3 ...

Page 632: ...ee if it is free of wobbling NO Clean the surface of the scanner rail and apply a small amount of silicone oil so that the No 1 mirror base moves smoothly Photosensitive drum 5 Does the problem occur at intervals of about 250 mm YES 1 Check the drum gear 2 Check the ends of the drum in contact with the developing rolls for scratches and protrusions Drum drive gear 6 Does the problem occur at inter...

Page 633: ...erent NO Check the scanner YES Check the feeding system 3 20 The print has poor sharpness Reader assembly 1 Does the problem occur only in copy mages YES Go to step 2 NO Go to step 4 Copyboard glass 2 Is the copyboard glass coated with oil YES Clean the copyboard glass Mirrors 3 Is the horizontal reproduction on in copies made in Direct within stan dards NO Adjust the distance between No 1 mirror ...

Page 634: ...NO 1 Check the primary charging assembly 2 Check the HVT PCB 3 Check the potential sensor and the potential control PCB Developing assembly locking unit 3 During printing is the developing assembly locked against the photo sensitive drum NO Check the mechanism of the developing assembly locking unit Developing assembly drive assembly 4 During copying is the developing assembly rotating NO Check th...

Page 635: ...ges YES Go to step 2 NO Go to step 3 Scanning lamp 2 Is the scanning lamp on NO See The scanning lamp fails to turn on YES Check the connection of the following PCBs if normal replace the PCB 1 CCD AP PCB 2 DC controller PCB Laser unit 3 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER DISPLAY MISC LPOWER Is the laser output present during printing NO Replace the laser unit YES 1 Replace the D...

Page 636: ... let the fixing upper roller cool Then turn on the main power switch Clear E000 and trun off and then on the main power switch Make the following in service mode COPIER I O DC CON Are bit 4 and bit 5 of IO P12 0 YES Check the wiring if normal replace the DC controller PCB NO Check the wiring if normal replace the AC driver PCB 4 1 2 E001 AC driver PCB fixing heater drive circuit short circuit 1 Wh...

Page 637: ... thermistor TH1 mounting 3 Is the thermistor in even contact with the fixing upper roller NO Mount it correctly Main thermistor TH1 soiling 4 Clean the area of contact of the thermistor Is the problem cor rected YES End Main thermistor TH1 faulty 5 Try replacing the thermistor Is the problem corrected YES End Fixing heater H1 H2 DC controller PCB 6 Try replacing the heater Is the problem corrected...

Page 638: ... the photointerrupters NO Replace the sensor YES Replace the DC controller PCB 4 1 7 E010 Connector 1 Is the connector of the main motor connected NO Connect the connector Main motor M2 DC controller PCB 2 When the Start key is pressed does the voltage between J108 A6 and J108 A8 on the DC controller PCB change from 0 to about 5 V YES Replace the main motor NO Check the wiring if normal replace th...

Page 639: ... in service mode COPIER I O DC CON Is bit 15 of IO P02 0 YES It is likely that the feedscrew inside the waste toner pipe is pre vented from rotating because of some fault If the outlet of the waste toner pipe is clogged with toner remove the waste toner drive unit and remove the toner If otherwise try turning the main motor clockwise by hand If the screw rotates wait and see what happens if the sc...

Page 640: ...og or replace the hopper unit General condition Developing assembly toner sensor TS1 3 Is the developing assembly adequately provided with toner YES Check the developing assembly toner sensor General condition Hopper toner sensor TS2 4 Is the hopper adequately provided with toner NO Check the hopper toner sensor Hopper connector Hopper supply motor M10 5 Is the connection of the hopper connector n...

Page 641: ...r unit 3 Replace the laser unit Remedied YES End NO Check the wiring If the wiring is normal replace the DC control ler PCB Preconditioning LED 4 Display COPIER DISPLAY DPOT in service mode Is PLMT 1V NO Display COPIER FUNCTION MISC P PRE EXP in service mode Check if the preconditioning LED lights If the LED does not light replace the LED Potential sensor 5 Replace the potential sensor Remedied No...

Page 642: ...Is the connector J116 on the DC controller PCB connected se curely NO Connect the connector securely Connector 2 Open the manual feed cover and remove the developing assembly locking plate Is the relay connector 5 pin behind the laser scan ner plate connected securely Do NOT detach the lid of the laser scanner unit NO Connect it securely Laser scanner unit DC controller PCB 3 Try replacing the las...

Page 643: ...kers on the EEPROMs IC104 brown IC105 red IC109 yellow IC110 green IC127 blue IC130 white NO Fit the EEPROM to the correct socket EEPROMs 2 Are all EEPROMs securely connected to the sockets of the DC con troller PCB NO Connect them correctly Data 3 Execute the following in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR DC CON Is the problem cor rected Thereafter be sure to enter the service mode data once aga...

Page 644: ...2 Adjust the sensitivity of the ADF read sensor Is the problem cor rected YES End Read sensor S2 3 Try replacing the ADF read sensor Is the problem corrected YES End ADF controller PCB Reader controller PCB 4 Try replacing the ADF controller PCB Is the problem corrected YES End NO Check the wiring if normal replace the reader controller PCB 4 1 20 E220 Wiring 1 Is the wiring from the xenon lamp to...

Page 645: ...n on the power switch Is the problem corrected YES Check the operation once again if normal end the work Control panel CPU PCB Main controller PCB 2 Try replacing the control panel CPU PCB Is the problem cor rected YES End NO Check the wiring if normal replace the main controller PCB 4 1 24 E248 EEPROMs 1 Are the EEPROMs connected securely to the sockets of the reader controller PCB NO Connect the...

Page 646: ...replace the main controller PCB 4 1 26 E601 a E601 0000 Wiring 1 Are the connection and the cable of the connector J1017 on the main controller PCB and the connector J1551 on the hard disk drive normal NO Correct the connection cable Hard disk drive HDD Main controller PCB 2 Try replacing the hard disk drive and downloading the system soft ware Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the main ...

Page 647: ...ain controller PCB 4 1 28 E607 Foreign object 1 Is there a foreign object that hinders the rotation of the fan in the rotating mechanism of the hard disk fan YES Remove the foreign object Connector 2 Is the connector J124 on the DC controller PCB connected se curely NO Connect it securely Hard disk fan FM7 DC controller PCB 3 Try replacing the hard disk fan Is the problem corrected YES End NO Chec...

Page 648: ...then on the power switch Is the problem corrected YES Check the operation once gain if normal end the work NO Replace the main controller PCB 4 1 31 E711 a E711 0001 Wrong operation 1 Turn off and then on the main power switch Is the problem cor rected YES Check the operation once again if normal end the work Connector ADF controller PCB 2 Is the interface cable between the ADF controller PCB and ...

Page 649: ...wer switch Is the problem cor rected YES Check the operation once again if normal end the work Connector 2 Is the cable between the ADF controller PCB and the reader con troller PCB normal NO Correct the cable ADF controller PCB Reader controller PCB 3 Try replacing the ADF controller PCB Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the reader controller PCB 4 1 33 E713 Wrong operation 1 Turn off a...

Page 650: ...n vendor Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the main controller PCB 4 1 36 E732 Wrong operation 1 Turn off and then on the main power switch Is the problem cor rected YES Check the operation once again if normal end the work Connectors Reader controller PCB 2 Is the connection of the connector J1014 on the main controller PCB and the connector J5004 on the reader controller PCB nor mal Fu...

Page 651: ...nd the connectors of the main controller PCB normal Further is the cable between these connectors normal NO Correct the connectors cable MAC address setting 4 Have the MAC address checked by the network administrator and reset it Is the problem corrected YES End LAN card Main controller PCB 5 Try replacing the Network PCB Is the problem corrected YES End NO Replace the main controller PCB If the r...

Page 652: ...ctors normal NO Correct the connection cable YES Replace the main controller PCB 4 1 41 E804 Foreign object 1 Is there a foreign object that hinders the rotation of the fan in the rotating mechanism of the DC power supply fan YES Remove the foreign object Connector 2 Is the connector J102 on the DC controller PCB connected se curely NO Connect the connector securely DC power supply fan FM6 DC cont...

Page 653: ... Feeding fan FM1 DC controller PCB 3 Try replacing the feeding fan Is the problem corrected YES End NO Check the wiring if normal replace the DC controller PCB 4 1 43 E824 Foreign object 1 Is there a foreign object that hinders the rotation of the fan in the rotating mechanisms of the primary charging cooling fan YES Remove the foreign object Fan direction mounting condition 2 Are the orientation ...

Page 654: ...er and shift the switch of the leakage breaker to the marking Power cord Line noise filter LF1 4 Try replacing the power cord line filter Is the problem corrected NO Check the wiring of the AC power supply line and the connectors for poor contact Main power switch SW1 Wiring 5 Is the resistance 0Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω when the switch is turned on and Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω when the switch is turned off NO Replace the power...

Page 655: ... 5 J4004 3 24VU2 5 J4009 3 24VU2 5 J4003 1 24VU3 5 J4006 1 24VU3 5 J4007 1 3 24VU4 5 J4010 1 24VU4 5 J4011 1 24VU4 5 J4013 2 24VA 7 5 However the above output voltages assume tolerances of 10 in the AC input power YES Check the wiring from the DC power supply PCB to each load NO Replace the DC power supply PCB 4 2 3 Pickup fails General condition 1 Slide out and then in the cassette Is the sound o...

Page 656: ...ex feeding motor 15 Vertical path upper motor 17 Vertical path lower motor 16 NO Check the wiring and the motor driver PCB if normal replace the motor Registration roller clutch 7 Is the leading edge of paper as far as the registration roller assem bly YES See The registration roller fails to rotate Pickup assembly 8 Open the right upper cover and the right lower cover and put pa per over the door...

Page 657: ...mit sensor PS8 Left deck limit sensor PS12 4 Is the voltage of the following connectors on the DC controller PCB about 0 V Sensor Right deck limit sensor J112 B8 J112 B7 Left deck limit sensor J115 A2 J115 A1 NO Check the sensor flag and the wiring if normal replace the sensor Right deck lifter motor M5 Left deck lifter motor M4 DC controller PCB 5 Turn on the main power switch and set the meter r...

Page 658: ...ower switch and set the meter range to 30 VDC then connect the probe of the meter to GND and the probe to the following connectors from the DC controller PCB When the cassette is inserted does the voltage change from about 0 to 24 V Motor Cassette 3 lifter motor J105 11 GND Cassette 4 lifter motor J105 10 GND YES Check the wiring and the motor drive PCB if normal replace the motor NO Replace the D...

Page 659: ...c tors 4 2 7 The vertical path roller fails to rotate Belt Gear Coupling 1 It the drive from the vertical path duplex feeding motor M25 transmitted to each vertical path roller through the belt gear and coupling NO Mount the belt gear and coupling correctly Vertical path duplex feeding motor M25 2 Execute code 15 by making the following selections in service mode COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK MTR Does ...

Page 660: ... I O DC CON IO P01 in service mode change from 0 to 1 NO Check the wiring and the sensor flag if normal replace the sensor Registration roller clutch CL2 3 Execute code 5 by making the following selections in service mode COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK CL Does the clutch operate NO Check the wiring and fixing feeding relay PCB if normal replace the clutch DC controller PCB 4 Try replacing the DC control...

Page 661: ... the pre exposure LED if normal replace the pre exposure LED Pre exposure LED LA1 DC controller PCB 2 Set the meter range to 30 VDC Does the voltage between J103 A3 and J103 A4 GND on the DC controller PCB change from 0 to 24 V YES Check the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the pre exposure LED if normal replace the pre exposure LED NO Replace the DC controller PCB 4 2 11 The scanning lamp fai...

Page 662: ...NO Replace the DC controller PCB Relay connector J153 J158 4 Is the connection of the relay connector secure NO Connect it securely 4 2 13 The hopper supply motor M10 fails to operate General condition 1 Execute code 6 MTR ON in service mode COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK MTR Doe the motor oper ate Be sure to turn off the motor within about 10 sec to prevent clogging with toner NO Go to step 3 Hopper to...

Page 663: ...the probes of the meter to J102 B8 and J102 B7 on the DC controller PCB Is the volt age between terminals about 2 V during copying and 0 V during standby NO Replace the DC controller PCB Drum heater H3 4 Remove the drum and set the meter range to Ω Ω Ω Ω Ωx1 Does the index of the meter swing when the probes of the meter are connected to both ends of the heater NO Replace the drum heater YES Replac...

Page 664: ... the wiring from the control panel to the main controller PCB if normal replace the main controller PCB 4 2 18 The Set Control Card message fails to turn off Control card 1 Is the control card inserted correctly NO Insert the control card correctly CC IV Main controller PCB 2 Can a print be made by pressing the Start key YES Replace the CC IV NO Replace the main controller PCB 4 2 19 The Add Paper...

Page 665: ...ain relay RL1 3 Try replacing the main relay Is the problem corrected YES End Fixing heater H1 H2 4 Connect the probes of the meter to both terminals of the fixing heater Is there electrical continuity NO Replace the fixing heater AC driver PCB DC controller PCB 5 Is the voltage between the following connectors on the DC control ler PCB about 5 V Heater Main heater H1 J102 B11 J102 B7 Sub heater H...

Page 666: ...he Start key is pressed Clutch Deck pickup clutch J05 11 J05 12 YES Check the wiring if normal replace the clutch NO Replace the deck driver PCB 4 2 23 The deck lifter fails to move up side paper deck Deck 1 Is the deck mounted correctly NO Mount the deck correctly Lifter cable 2 Is the lifter cable routed correctly NO Route the lifter cable correctly Spring Lever 3 Push up the deck pickup roller ...

Page 667: ...FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 51 T Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch SW102 Deck driver PCB 6 Is the voltage between J08 8 and J08 7 GND on the deck driver PCB as follows when the deck is opened closed opened 0 V closed 5 V YES Check the lever and the wiring if normal replace the switch NO Replace the deck driver PCB ...

Page 668: ...rring in the machine may be grouped into the following by location 1 Pickup assembly 2 Separation feeding assembly 3 Fixing delivery assembly 4 Drum cleaning assembly 5 Duplex reversing assembly 6 Feeding assembly The troubleshooting procedures that follow are organized according to location to find out the location and the nature of a jam use service mode COPIER DISPLAY JAM F04 501 01 2 3 4 5 6 1...

Page 669: ...r worn YES Replace the pickup roller Guide plate NO Check the guide plate for deformation 5 1 2 Separation Feeding assembly Print paper 1 Is the leading edge of print paper past the registration roller YES Go to step 5 NO Check the distance between the upper and lower guides in front of the registration roller then make adjustments as needed Registration roller 2 Is the coupling of the registratio...

Page 670: ...bly damaged YES Replace the separation claws 11 Is the spring of the separation claw displaced YES Mount the spring correctly Feeding belt 12 Are the three feeding belts rotating correctly NO Check the belts and pulleies Feeding fan YES Check to make sure that the feeding fan is operating 5 1 3 Fixing Delivery assembly Separation claws delivery assembly 1 Are the separation claws worn deformed YES...

Page 671: ...g plate with your finger Dos it re turn to its initial position by the work of the spring NO Correct how the delivery paper deflecting plate is mounted 12 Us the paper path of the delivery paper deflecting plate deformed or scratched YES Replace the delivery paper deflecting plate Delivery roller drive assembly 13 Does the delivery roller move smoothly NO Check the delivery roller drive assembly L...

Page 672: ... the height of the charging wire Separation claws cleaning assembly 3 Are the separation claws under the cleaning assembly damaged YES Replace the separation claws 4 Is the spring of the separation claws displaced YES Mount the spring correctly Print paper High voltage transformer DC controller PCB 5 Try paper of a type recommended by Canon Is the problem cor rected YES Advise the user to use reco...

Page 673: ...R6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 57 T Motor 4 Do the reversal motor M14 duplex feeding left motor M29 du plex feeding right motor M18 and vertical path duplex motor M25 rotate at the correct timing NO Replace the motor ...

Page 674: ...egistration roller Check the operation for the feeding fan Check the separation charging assembly Print paper 2 Try paper fresh out of package Is the problem corrected YES The paper may be moist Advise the user on the correct method of storing paper 3 Try paper recommended by Canon Is the problem corrected YES Advise the user to use recommended paper Paper guide Fixing assembly inlet drive solenoi...

Page 675: ...ngement and Functions of Electrical Parts 6 1 Clutches F04 601 01 6 1 1 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have a clutch 6 1 2 Printer Unit Symbol Name Notation Function Clutch CL1 Drives the developing cylinder CL2 Drives the registration roller CL3 Drives the manual feed pickup roller CL4 Drives the left deck pull off roller CL1 CL4 CL3 CL2 CL ...

Page 676: ...NC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 60 T 6 2 Solenoids and Switches F04 602 01 SW3 SW4 SW1 MSW1 MSW2 MSW3 SL9 SL5 SL2 SL3 SL4 SL7 SL6 SL8 SL1 SW2 ...

Page 677: ...3 Drives the cassette 3 pickup mechanism SL4 Drives the cassette 4 pickup mechanism SL5 Drives the delivery flapper SL6 Drives the right deck pickup mechanism SL7 Drives the left deck pickup mechanism SL8 Drives the reversing flapper SL9 Drives the fixing web Switch SW1 Main power switch SW2 Front cover switch SW3 Environment switch SW4 Cassette heater switch MSW1 Detects the state locked of the w...

Page 678: ...0 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 62 T M4 M13 M6 M3 M15 M8 M7 M20 M21 M14 M29 M18 M16 M19 M12 M9 M1 M17 M25 M26 M24 M11 M27 M2 M10 M5 6 3 Motors F04 603 01 ...

Page 679: ... M7 Pre transfer charging wire cleaning motor M8 Transfer separation charging wire cleaning motor M9 Hopper stirring motor M10 Hopper supply motor M11 Right deck pickup motor M12 Cassette 3 4 pickup motor M13 Delivery motor M14 Reversal motor M15 Laser scanner motor M16 Duplex horizontal registration motor M17 Pre registration motor M18 Duplex feeding right motor M19 Fixing motor M20 Cassette 3 li...

Page 680: ...COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 64 T FM3 FM1 FM4 FM2 FM5 FM8 FM7 FM6 6 4 Fans F04 604 01 ...

Page 681: ...E FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 65 T 6 4 1 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have a fan 6 4 2 Printer unit Symbol Name Notation Function Fan FM1 Feeding fan FM2 Primary charging cooling fan FM3 Heat discharging fan FM4 Controller cooling fan FM5 De curling fan FM6 DC power supply fan FM7 HDD fan FM8 Duplex feeding fan ...

Page 682: ...JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 66 T SVR2 SVR4 SVR5 SV1 SV2 PS50 PS49 PS48 PS47 SVR3 PS25 PS23 PS26 PS13 PS21 PS17 PS15 PS27 PS14 PS16 PS18 PS22 PS12 PS20 PS10 PS9 PS8 PS40 PS39 PS43 PS19 PS6 PS5 PS7 PS32 PS28 PS24 PS11 6 5 Sensors F04 605 01 ...

Page 683: ...001 CANON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 67 T PS4 PS36 PS46 PS35 PS45 PS29 PS37 PS38 PS34 PS31 PS30 PS33 PS2 SVR1 PS3 F04 605 02 ...

Page 684: ...k paper sensor PS8 Right deck limit sensor PS9 Left deck open closed sensor PS10 Left deck lifter sensor PS11 Left deck paper sensor PS12 Left deck limit sensor PS13 Cassette 3 paper sensor PS14 Cassette 4 paper sensor PS15 Cassette 3 open closed sensor PS16 Cassette 4 open closed sensor PS17 Cassette 3 lifter sensor PS18 Cassette 4 lifter sensor PS19 Right deck re try sensor PS20 Left deck re try...

Page 685: ...sensor 2 PS45 Fixing web length sensor PS46 Delivery jam sensor PS47 Right deck level sensor upper PS48 Right deck level sensor lower PS49 Left deck level sensor upper PS50 Left deck level sensor lower Photointerrupter SV1 Detects the length of paper in the cassette 4 100 V model only SV2 Detects the length of paper in the cassette 3 Slide resistor SVR1 Detects the width of paper on the manual fee...

Page 686: ...ON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 70 T TS2 HU1 TS1 LA1 H3 H5 H4 ELCB H2 H1 TP1 H6 THM1 THM2 LA2 6 6 Lamps Heaters and Others F04 606 01 ...

Page 687: ...inter Unit Name Notation Function Lamp LA1 Pre exposure lamp LED Heater H1 Fixing main heater H2 Fixing sub heater H3 Drum heater H4 Cassette heater standard in 100 V model Thermistor TH1 Fixing heater main thermistor TH2 Fixing heater sub thermistor ends Thermal switch TP1 Fixing heater thermal switch Leakage breaker ELCB Leakage breaker Toner sensor TS1 Developing assembly toner sensor TS2 Hoppe...

Page 688: ...NON INC 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 72 T 6 7 PCBs F04 607 01 11 17 12 9 23 20 6 7 4 8 5 1 24 29 26 27 28 21 22 2 10 3 14 18 15 30 13 25 ...

Page 689: ...ce potential of the photosensitive drum 7 Drum heater control PCB Controls the drum heater 8 Accessories power supply PCB Supplies power to the finisher 9 Duplex driver PCB Controls the sensor motor and solenoid of the du plex unit 10 Control panel PCB Controls the keys and LEDs 11 Laser driver PCB Controls the laser drive 14 BD PCB Detects the laser beam 17 Control panel CPU PCB Controls the cont...

Page 690: ...ition and must be kept in mind 2 VRs that may be used in the field VRs that must not be used in the field Any VR and check pin not found in the lists is for use at the factory requir ing special tools and high accuracy Do not touch them in the field 6 8 1 Main Controller PCB F06 608 01 The DIP switch SW1002 is for the factory Do not use it in the field It is used when making settings before shipme...

Page 691: ...upon replacement F04 608 03 J110 J113 J111 J125 J109 J107 J112 J104 J105 J115 J102 J101 J119 J106 J118 J103 J124 J108 J114 J302 J120 J116 J117 J121 J123 J126 J303 J203 VR103 J100 J201 B1 B17 B1 B15 B1 B14 A1 A9 1 3 A1 A17 A1 A1 A1 A9 A1 A20 A1 A15 13 1 A1 A16 A1 1 8 4 1 1 6 A20 B1 2 1 1 12 1 5 A1 A20 1 8 A1 5 1 10 1 1 1 4 1 4 1 20 4 4 1 A1 A12 B12 B1 B1 B20 B20 A18 B1 B1 B1 B15 B1 B16 B9 B1 B20 A1...

Page 692: ... SW5001 1 4 1 6 1 1 5 1 1 1 4 1 3 1 4 6 3 2 J5004 A1 B1 A40 B40 1 2 6 8 3 Reader Controller PCB F04 608 04 SW5001 1 SW5001 2 ON Inch series Not used OFF AB series Not used 6 8 4 Power Supply PCB F04 608 05 J4011 J4015 J4008 J4016 J4004 PN4006 PN4001 PN4004 PN4003 PN4002 J4001 J4007 J4006 J4005 PN4005 J4017 J4003 J4014 J4009 J4010 J4002 J4013 2 5 1 1 1 10 11 8 1 1 1 4 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 15 2 3 5 4 1 4 2...

Page 693: ... 4 77 T 6 8 5 HVT PCB F04 608 06 6 8 6 Drum Heater Control PCB F04 608 07 SW2001 1 SW2001 2 ON controlled to 47 C Not used OFF controlled to 43 C default Not used For details of drum heater control see 6 Controlling the Drum Heater in Chapter 4 J4502 J4501 VR4501 J4503 J4505 J4508 J4507 J4506 J4504 1 13 1 2 1 5 1 3 SW2001 ON 1 2 J2001 ...

Page 694: ...offers two ways of downloading requiring care when deciding on which one to use Downloading in Download Mode To start download mode 1 While holding down 2 and 8 keys on the keypad at the same time turn the power switch 2 Hold down the 2 and 8 keys until Download Mode appears at the bottom of the touch panel Files for Downloading System Language RUI BOOT ROM HD Format FSTDEV PDLDEV DOSDEV Downloadi...

Page 695: ...NE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 79 T 7 1 2 Before the Work Obtain the following PC to which the Service Support Tool version 1 28 or later has been installed Parallel cable with the notation IEEE 1284Std compliant or CrossEthernet cable System CD ...

Page 696: ...OUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 80 T 7 2 Managing Data To start downloading you must store the necessary files in advance e g System RUI HD Format BOOT Language To store System for instance work as follows 1 Select the Service Support Tool 2 Select Next under Controlling Data F04 702 01 ...

Page 697: ...NON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 81 T 3 From the ROM Manage Data Work screen select Registering Firmware F04 702 02 4 From the following screen select Register from Selected Folder F04 702 03 ...

Page 698: ...00 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 82 T 5 Select the drive in which you have inserted the System CD ROM 6 Select the file of the correct version and press Register F04 702 04 ...

Page 699: ...n disconnect the power plug and the network cable 2 Connect the PC to the parallel connector found on the right side of the controller using a parallel cable The PC must remain off The 25 pin connector of the bi Centronics cable must be connected to the PC side while the 36 pin connector must be connected to the host machine side 3 Turn on the PC and start the Service Support Tool 4 Connect the po...

Page 700: ... 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 84 T 2 Select System or RUI then select Connect There is not installed Network Multi PDL Printer kit A1 then select iR5000 There is installed Network Multi PDL Printer kit A1 then select iR5000N F04 703 02 ...

Page 701: ...t service mode of the host machine and make the following selections COPIER Function SYSTEM DOWNLOAD then press OK so that the host ma chine will be in download standby mode notation STNDBY 4 If the notation in the upper right of the screen indicates standard mode go to step 6 if it indicates low speed mode on the other hand go to step 5 F04 703 03 ...

Page 702: ...TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 86 T 5 Press Switch Operation Mode to bring up the Centronics Communication Mode Switch Over Screen Select Standard Mode and press OK Select To Unit Select Screen and go back to step 2 to start over F04 703 04 6 Press OK to start connection F04 703 05 ...

Page 703: ...NON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 87 T 7 The following screen appears when the connection is made Press OK F04 703 06 8 Select System Software Download from the Service Support Tool F04 703 07 ...

Page 704: ... off the PC by making the following selections OK Return to PCB Select Menu Return to Previous Screen End 7 3 3 After the Work 1 Turn off the main power switch of the host machine and disconnect the power plug 2 Turn off the PC 3 Remove the parallel cable from the PC and the host machine 4 If a network cable is used connect it to the appropriate location then turn on the main power switch of the h...

Page 705: ...ht side of the controller with a paral lel cable The PC must remain off The 25 pin connector of the bi Centronics cable must be connected to the PC side while its 36 pin connector must be connected to the host machine 2 Turn on the PC and start up the Service Support Tool 3 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet while holding down the 2 and 8 keys on the keypad at the same ...

Page 706: ...2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 90 T 7 4 2 Preparing the BOOT ROM 1 Select Next under Download Upload F04 704 01 2 Select BOOT and select Connect F04 704 02 ...

Page 707: ...ation in the upper right of the screen indicates standard mode go to step 5 if it indicates low speed mode on the other hand go to step 4 F04 704 03 4 Press Switch Operation Mode so that the Centronics Communication Mode Switch Over screen will appear Select Standard Mode and select OK Select To Return Unit Select Screen and go back to step 2 to start over F04 704 04 ...

Page 708: ...HAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 92 T 5 Select OK to start connection F04 704 05 6 The following screen will appear when the connection is completed Select OK F04 704 06 Note The contents of the BOOT ROM shown are those of the BOOT ROM mounted to the connector J1010 ...

Page 709: ...0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 93 T 7 Select BOOT ROM Download from the Service Support Tool F04 704 07 8 Select the appropriate files for the Service Support Tool from the list of software then click Start to start downloading F04 704 08 ...

Page 710: ...001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 94 T 9 See the progress bar indicating the progress of download work 10 When downloading ends turn off the PC by making the following selections OK Return to Unit Select Menu OK Return to Main Menu End Service Support Tool ...

Page 711: ...TER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 95 T 7 5 Formatting the HDD If you have replaced the HDD you must reformat it and download the system software RUI Language to the newly formatted HDD 7 5 1 Making Connections 7 5 2 Formatting 1 Select Next under Download Upload F04 705 01 ...

Page 712: ...NE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 96 T 2 Select HD Format and select Connect F04 705 02 3 If the notation in the upper right of the screen indicates standard mode go to step 5 if it indicates low speed mode on the other hand go to step 4 F04 705 03 ...

Page 713: ... TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 97 T 4 Press Switch Mode to bring up the Centronics Combination Mode Switch Over screen Select Standard Mode and select OK Select To Return Unit Select Screen and go back to step 2 to start over F04 705 04 5 Select OK to start connection F04 705 05 ...

Page 714: ...ANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 98 T 6 When the connection is completed the following screen appears Select OK F04 705 06 7 When a Confirmation screen has appeared select Format F04 705 07 ...

Page 715: ...000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 99 T 8 When the Start Confirmation screen has appeared select Start F04 705 08 9 When the Start Confirmation screen has appeared once again select Start once gain F04 705 09 ...

Page 716: ...g has been completed a message will appear to that effect select OK F04 705 10 11 A screen will appear asking you if you want to continue and download the system soft ware if the host machine is a copier model select Download the System Software to start downloading If a RIP1 PCB is installed go to the Model and Unit Select screen and select iR5000N F04 705 11 ...

Page 717: ...ain Menu End Service Support Tool F04 705 12 7 5 3 Points to Note on Formatting the HDD 1 Be sure to download the system software whenever you have formatted the hard disk Turning on the power without downloading the system soft ware will lead to an error E602 0002 2 When you turn on the power for the first time after you have installed the system software following the formatting of the hard disk...

Page 718: ...de settings User mode settings Various machine information By keeping the data as a backup you can make use of it after replacing the main control ler PCB thereby simplifying the work of setting up service mode or user mode We recommend that you make a backup of the data using the Service Support Tool when ever you have changed the service mode or user mode settings 8 1 1 Before the Work Obtain th...

Page 719: ... the network cable 8 2 2 Making Connections 1 Connect the PC to the parallel connector on the right side of the controller with a paral lel cable The PC must remain off The 25 pin connector of the PC must be connected to the PC while the 36 pin connec tor is connected to the Service Support Tool 2 Turn on the PC and start up the Service Support Tool 3 Connect the power plug of the host machine to ...

Page 720: ...2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 104 T 8 2 3 Backing Up the Data 1 Select Next under Download Upload F04 802 01 2 Select SYSTEM and select Connect F04 802 02 ...

Page 721: ... if the notation in the upper right of the screen indicates standard mode go to step 5 if it indicates low speed mode go to step 4 F04 802 03 4 Press Switch Operation Mode so that the Centronics Communication Switch Over screen will appear Select Standard Mode and select OK Select To Return Unit Se lect Screen and go back to step 2 to start over F04 802 04 ...

Page 722: ...00 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 106 T 5 Select OK and start connection F04 802 05 6 When the connection has been made the following screen will appear Select OK F04 802 06 ...

Page 723: ...000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 107 T 7 Select Upload the Backup Data from the Service Support Tool F04 802 07 8 Select ALL select Start to Storing F04 802 08 ...

Page 724: ... indicating the progress of storage operation 10 Select the driver and enter the name of the file then select Save F04 802 09 11 When the data has been stored in the selected drive the following screen will appear make the following selections to end the Service Support Tool OK To Return Unit Se lect Screen OK To Return Main Menu End Service Support Tool F04 802 10 ...

Page 725: ... 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 109 T 8 2 4 Downloading the Backup Data 1 Select Next under Download Upload F04 802 11 2 Select SYSTEM and select Connect F04 802 12 ...

Page 726: ...ation in the upper right of the screen indicates standard mode go to step 5 if it indicates low speed mode on the other hand go to step 4 F04 802 013 4 Press Switch Operation Mode so that the Centronics Communication Mode Switch Over screen will appear Select Standard Mode and select OK Select To Return Unit Select Screen and go back to step 2 to start over F04 802 14 ...

Page 727: ...C 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 111 T 5 Select OK to start connection F04 802 15 6 When the connection has been completed select OK F04 802 16 ...

Page 728: ...000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 112 T 7 Select Download the Backup Data F04 802 17 8 Select the file to download and select Start Writing F04 802 18 ...

Page 729: ...TING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 113 T 9 See the progress bar indicating the progress of download work When the following screen has appeared to indicate the end of the work press OK F04 802 19 10 Make the following selections to end the Service Support Tool OK Return to Main Menu End Service Support Tool ...

Page 730: ... CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 114 T 8 2 5 Managing the Backup Data You can delete any backup data you no longer need without having to connect the host machine to a PC 1 Select Next under Controlling Data F04 802 20 2 Select Controlling Backup Data F04 802 21 ...

Page 731: ...BLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 115 T 3 Select the file to delete from the list of backup data stored on the PC so indicated on the screen then select Remove F04 802 22 4 When a screen has appeared asking you if you really want to delete the file check the file and select Remove F04 802 23 ...

Page 732: ...EV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS MALFUNCTIONS 4 116 T 5 When the End delete screen has appeared select OK Make the following selections to end the Service Support Tool To Return Previous Screen To Return Main Menu End Service Support Tool F04 802 24 ...

Page 734: ...ee Initial screen Level 1 Level 2 screen and Level 3 screen F05 101 01 Initial screen Level 1 Level 2 screen Level 3 screen Level 3 screen User screen From Level 1 Level 2 screen Reset key Preceding Following page Preceding Following page Preceding Following page 2 8 Reset key Select a Level 1 item at the top of the screen Select a Level 2 item from the list Level 3 screen Level 3 screen Select an...

Page 735: ... keys at the same time 3 Press the user mode key In response the Initial screen will appear COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD DISPLAY I O ADJUST FUNCTION OPTION TEST COUNTER Control display mode I O display mode Adjustment mode Operation inspection mode Settings mode Test print mode Counter mode F05 102 01 COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD Service mode of the accessory boards Service mode of the ADF Only if ins...

Page 736: ...ustment settings are indicated on the service label attached to the service book case found behind the front cover The service label of the reader unit is attached behind the reader rear upper cover If you have replaced the reader controller PCB or the DC controller PCB be sure to re move the EEPROM from the old PCB and mount it to the new PCB If you have initialized the RAM the ADJUST and OPTION ...

Page 737: ... T 1 5 Basic Operations 1 5 1 Initial Screen F05 105 01 1 5 2 Level 1 Level 2 Screen F05 105 02 COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD Initial item Touch to select an item VERSION USER ANALOG CST STS ACC STS JAM ERR HV STS ALARM 1 DPOT SENSOR Level 1 item Touch to select an item Level 2 items Touch to select an item MISC ...

Page 738: ...ration JAM paper jam exists SERVICE service operation under way WAITING initial rotation or the like under way DOOR door open COPYING copying under way ERROR error exists NO TONER toner absent WTNR FUL full of waste toner Level 2 item Level 3 item To go back to previous page To go to next page Page number OK key stops the ongoing operation Accepts input value Switches between and Stop key clears a...

Page 739: ...JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 5 6 T 2 DISPLAY control display mode 2 1 COPIER The following screen appears in response to COPIER DISPLAY for the items see the pages that follow F05 201 01 VERSION USER ANALOG CST STS ACC STS JAM ERR HV STS DPOT SENSOR ALARM 1 ALARM 2 MISC ...

Page 740: ...r controller PCB SORTER Indicates the ROM version of the finisher controller PCB NIB Indicates the version of the network software PS PCL Indicates the version of the PS PCL LIPS Indicates the version of the printer board LIPS SDL STCH Indicates the ROM version of the saddle stitcher controller PCB MN CONT Indicates the version of the software of the main controller PCB RIP1 Indicates the version ...

Page 741: ...on of the Danish file LANG EL Indicates the version of the Greek file LANG ES Indicates the version of the Spanish file LANG ET Indicates the version of the Estonian file LANG FI Indicates the version of the Finnish file LANG HU Indicates the version of the Hungarian file LANG KO Indicates the version of the Koran file LANG NL Indicates the version of the Dutch file LANG NO Indicates the version o...

Page 742: ...inese file simplified USER Indicates the User screen and items related to the user LANGUAGE Indicates the language paper size configuration used Display LANGUAGE xxyy zz aa xx 2 higher order digits country code yy 2 lower order digits language code zz destination code 00 CANON 01 OEM aa paper size configuration code 00 AB 01 Inch 02 A 03 all sizes COUNTER Indicates the type of control of the softw...

Page 743: ...es the connection of the control card 0 not connected 1 con nected DATA CON Indicates the connection of a self diagnosis device 0 none 1 copy data controller 2 remote diagnostic device RAM Indicates the size of the memory mounted to the main controller 64 MB 128 MB NIB Indicates the connection of a network board 0 none 1 Etherboard 2 To ken Ring 3 both LIPS RAM Indicates the size of the memory mou...

Page 744: ...M Indicates the machine s internal humidity by environment sensor Unit RH FIX U Indicates the temperature of the upper fixing roller Unit C COPIER DISPLAY CST STS Indicates the paper size of the cassette and the manual feeder WIDTH C3 Indicates the paper width of the cassette 3 in terms of paper size WIDTH C4 Indicates the paper width of the cassette 4 in terms of paper size WIDTH MF Indicates the...

Page 745: ... recovery time 24 hour notation E Indicates the location of occurrence 0 copying machine 1 feeder 2 finisher FFff Jam code FF jam type T05 201 01 ff jam sensor T05 201 02 For the feeder T05 201 04 G Indicates the source of paper T05 201 03 HHHHHH IIIII Indicates the paper size JAM 1 7 READY AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G H...

Page 746: ...plexing paper sensor PS34 xx16 duplexing pre registration sensor PS30 xx1E deck pickup sensor PS101 xx1F deck feed sensor PS106 xx32 buffer path sensor PI14 xx33 inlet sensor PI1 xx34 delivery sensor PI3 xx35 staple tray sensor PI4 xx36 vertical path paper sensor PI17S xx37 delivery sensor PI11S T05 201 02 G Source of Paper Code Description 1 right front deck 2 left front deck 3 cassette 3 4 casse...

Page 747: ...n DDDD Indicates the return time 24 hour notation EEEE Indicates the error code in question See Self Diagnosis in Chapter 6 FFff Indicates the detailed code in question if none 0000 G Indicates the location of occurrence 0 copying machine main controller 1 feeder 2 finisher 3 C F F 4 reader 5 printer 6 PDL 7 fax HH Not used ERR 1 7 READY AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G HH AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff...

Page 748: ...ry charging current PRE TR Indicates the level of current for pre transfer post charging TR Indicates the level of transfer charging current SP Indicates the level of separation charging current BIAS Indicates the level of developing bias DC SP N2 Indicates the level of separation charging current for the 2nd side of a double sided print TR N2 Indicates the level of transfer charging current for t...

Page 749: ...T Indicates the target dark area potential VD for copying VDM Indicates the measurement of the dark area potential VD for copying op timum value VDT 6 V reference only VL2M P Indicates the measurement of the light area potential VL2 for printer PDL images optimum value 70 15 V reference only VL1M P Indicates the measurement of the light area potential VL1 for printer PDL images optimum value VL1T ...

Page 750: ...l control for the laser intensity during output of printer PDL images range of indication 0 to 255 0 error LPOWER C Indicates the result of potential control for the laser intensity during output of copy images range of indication 0 to 255 0 error PRIM P Indicates the result of potential control for the primary charging current for printer PDL images range of indication 0 to 1400 µA optimum value ...

Page 751: ...HH F05 201 04 Item Description Remarks AA indicates sequence of alarm occurrences 1 to 50 50 max the higher the older BBBB indicates date of alarm month day 2 characters each CCCC indicates time of alarm 24 hr notation DDDD indicates time of alarm recovery 24 hr notation EEFFFF indicates alarm code See the table below GGGG indicates alarm detail code HHHHHHHH indicates total counter reading at tim...

Page 752: ...akage 0003 separation charging assembly leakage 33 fan system 0001 decurlig fan fault 0008 duplex unit feed fan fault 60 sorter finisher 0001 shift tray fault shift tray 61 stapler system of 0001 staple absent sorter finisher 62 saddle stitcher system 0001 stitch staple absent 65 puncher system of 0001 punch waste case full sorter finisher 2 2 FEEDER FEEDSIZE Indicates the size of an original dete...

Page 753: ...nse to COPIER I O for the items see the pages that follow F05 301 01 Guide to the Screen P001 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx bit 0 bit 15 address DC CON R CON FEEDER SORTER MN CONT Input output port of DC controller PCB Input output port of reader controller PCB Input output port of main controller PCB Input output port of ADF controller PCB Input output port of finisher controller PCB ...

Page 754: ...k feed paper sensor cassette 3 re try sensor signal cassette 4 re try sensor signal left deck re try sensor signal reversal sensor 1 signal right pre registering limit sensor signal duplexing pre registration senor signal duplexing horizontal pre registration sensor signal reversal sensor 2 signal laser write start sensor signal developing assembly toner sensor signal hopper toner sensor signal du...

Page 755: ...tection signal cassette 3 open closed sensor signal cassette 4 open closed sensor signal cassette 3 size detection signal 0 cassette 3 size detection signal 1 not used fixing sub thermistor error detection signal 1 fixing main thermistor error detection signal E001 error hard detection signal fixing sub thermistor error detection signal 2 main relay OFF detection signal main SSR error signal sub S...

Page 756: ...l sensor signal fixing motor clock detection laser scanner motor lock detection signal delivery jam sensor signal for factory adjustment for factory adjustment for factory adjustment for factory adjustment not used LZC ERROR LZD ERROR LZ HEAT RDY LZ HEAT ERROR shift tray paper sensor signal shift tray HP detection front shift tray HP detection rear shift tray connection detection signal flicker co...

Page 757: ...driver signal high voltage remote signal EEPROM select signal 1 EEPROM select signal 2 EEPROM select signal 3 shift tray detection signal shift tray motor CW signal shift tray motor CCW signal right deck pickup solenoid drive signal left deck pickup solenoid drive signal cassette 3 pickup solenoid drive signal cassette 4 pickup solenoid drive signal manual feed releasing solenoid drive signal not ...

Page 758: ...al hopper stirring motor drive signal hopper supply motor drive signal laser scanner motor speed switch signal cassette 4 lifter motor drive signal cassette 3 lifter motor drive signal not used not used fixing main heater ON signal fixing sub heater ON signal drum heater ON signal not used separation feed fan half speed signal separation feed fan full speed signal primary charging cooling fan half...

Page 759: ...tion not used not used not used not used pre exposure LED ON signal potential sensor ON signal fixing 12 V supply signal DDI PPRDY DDI CTS not used not used not used not used not used not used DDI CPRDY DDI PRSST DDI RST not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used duplexing feed fan not used reversal motor clock signal not used not us...

Page 760: ... not used not used not used not used pre registration motor clock signal not used duplexing feed right motor clock signal serial 0 TXD serial 1 TXD serial 0 RXD serial 1 RXD not used not used not used not used cassette paper width input port switch signal not used DC power supply fan drive signal duplexing horizontal registration motor clock signal not used not used not used not used not used not ...

Page 761: ...ignal not used deck paper supply position sensor signal deck paper level sensor signal deck lifter lower limit detection signal deck set sensor signal deck open sensor signal deck ID1 deck ID2 not used not used deck open LED ON signal deck pickup roller releasing solenoid drive signal not used deck pickup clutch drive signal not used not used deck main motor drive signal deck lifter motor drive si...

Page 762: ...M DDI SCTS DDI SPRDY DDI SCPRDY scanning lamp inverter error signal DDI S transmission RS232Ctransmission factoryterminaltransmission DDI S reception RS232C reception factory terminal reception ITOP transmission image leading edge signal DDI SRTS not used not used DDI SPO 0 DDI SPO 1 DDI SPO 2 not used not used not used original sensor 3 signal AB input original sensor 4 signal Inch input DDI SPRT...

Page 763: ...ot used not used not used not used not used not used scanner motor drive control 2 scanner motor drive control 3 scanner motor drive control 4 scanner motor drive control RETURN scanner motor drive control 0 1 scanner motor drive control 0 1 scanner motor drive current control scanner motor drive current control scanner motor drive current control scanner motor drive current control scanner motor ...

Page 764: ... DDI S general output DDI S general output 3 3 V non all night power OFF signal SSCNST signal DDI P general output DDI P general output DDI P general output PPRTST signal battery alarm parallel EEPROM R B flash ROM R B serial ROM connection detection operation enable CC IV operation enable coin robot serial EEPROM D0 HD connection detection battery charge control flash ROM write protect SPO 2 not ...

Page 765: ...t delivery count LCD back light control color UI I F enable parallel EEPROM write protect FAX SSB forced reset FAX SSB identification FAX SSB identification FAX SSB identification Color UI detect BWUI detect board version board version board version Remarks access port to EEPROM access port to EEPROM 1 counter 1 counter 1 count 1 count 1 ON not used 0 write enabled not used not used not used not u...

Page 766: ...n sensor signal A4R LTRR identification sensor signal pickup motor drive clock signal pickup motor mode signal pickup motor CW CCW signal pickup motor enable output not used feed motor enable output pickup clutch drive signal locking solenoid signal serial communication image leading edge signal serial communication EEPROM data output EEPROM clock EEPROM chip select not used not used original widt...

Page 767: ...not used not used cover open switch ADF open closed sensor signal delivery reversing motor excitation phase A output delivery reversing motor excitation phase A output delivery reversing motor excitation phase key B output delivery reversing motor excitation phase B output feed motor mode output feed motor mode output feed motor CW CCW switch signal DIP switch DIPSW8 signal DIP switch DIPSW7 signa...

Page 768: ...d not used not used not used not used not used LED ON signal LED ON signal LED ON signal LED ON signal not used not used not used not used tray volume post separation sensor analog input read sensor analog input delivery paper reversal sensor analog input not used not used not used not used pickup motor feed motor delivery reversal motor post separation sensor_DA post separation sensor_TH read sen...

Page 769: ...output alignment motor phase B output alignment motor phase A output not used tray lift motor PWM delivery motor PWM swing motor PWM punch motor PWM horizontal registration motor phase B output horizontal registration motor phaseA output tray lift motor DOWN drive output tray lift motor UP drive output not used not used LED2 ON solenoid output not used height sensor input LED1 ON signal output hei...

Page 770: ...d motor phase B output No 2 feed motor clock input inlet feed motor clock input No 1 feed motor clock input delivery motor clock detection signal not used not used not used not used not used not used tray lift motor clock signal 1 tray lift motor clock signal 2 swing motor clock detection signal not used stacker EEPROM CLK signal stacker EEPROM data out signal stitcher EEPROM CS signal LWR input o...

Page 771: ...d not used punch unit connection detection signal punch home position detection signal horizontalregistrationhomepositiondetectionsignal front cover open detecting switch signal upper cover open detecting switch signal not used not used not used not used PUSH SW3 PUSH SW2 punch unit EEPROM data in stapler shift home position detection signal alignment home position detection signal tray open posit...

Page 772: ...r CW drive output swing motor CCW drive output punch motor CCW drive output punch motor CW drive output delivery motor CCW drive output delivery motor CW drive output stapler motor CCW drive output stapler motor CW drive output not used stepping motor OFF punch horizontal registration motor current switch inlet feed motor current switch 2 inlet feed motor current swing 1 No 2 feed motor current sw...

Page 773: ...solenoid drive signal not used buffer inlet solenoid drive signal flapper solenoid drive signal paddle solenoid drive signal solenoid timer output escape solenoid drive signal not used not used dust full detection signal 24 V output OFF detection signal horizontal registration detection signal 1 horizontal registration detection signal 2 horizontal registration detection signal 3 horizontal regist...

Page 774: ... motor CCW drive output No 1 deflecting plate solenoid drive signal No 2 deflecting plate solenoid drive signal not used not used not used not used not used not used feed roller plate solenoid drive signal solenoid timer output paper positioning plate motor current switch not used 24 V output OFF detection signal paper push on plate leading edge position signal delivery detection signal not used n...

Page 775: ...ut not used paper push on plate motor CCW drive output not used alignment motor phase A output alignment motor phase B output paper fold motor PWM paper push on motor CW drive output guide motor phase A output guide motor phase B output guide motor current switch alignment motor current switch not used No 2 paper sensor paper detection signal No 3 paper sensor paper detection signal stitching HP d...

Page 776: ...pen detection signal inlet cover open detection signal delivery cover open detecting switch signal not used TIP SW1 bit 8 TIP SW1 bit 7 TIP SW1 bit 6 TIP SW1 bit 5 TIP SW1 bit 4 TIP SW1 bit 3 TIP SW1 bit 2 TIP SW1 bit 1 not used stitcher rear punching detection stitcher front punching detection not used inlet cover sensor connection detection not used guide HP sensor connection detection stitcher ...

Page 777: ...0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 5 44 T 4 ADJUST adjustment mode 4 1 COPIER The following screen appears in response to COPIER ADJUST for the items see the pages that follow F05 401 01 HV PRI V CONT ADJ XY CCD AE LASER MISC BLANK HV SP DENS DEVELOP HV TR FEED ADJ CST ADJ ...

Page 778: ...ginal density A lower setting decreases text density Copy density A higher setting increases text density AE Executing AE Adjustment If you have cleared the RAM on the reader controller PCB enter the settings indicated on the service label AE TBL Use it to adjust the density of characters for image density adjustment Range of 1 to 9 Default 5 adjustment ...

Page 779: ...scanner image leading edge position Range of 250 to 290 A change of 1 causes a shift of 0 1 mm adjustment Caution Be sure to execute this mode before adjusting the margin Do not use this mode to create a margin ADJ Y Use it to adjust the CCD read start position Range of 100 to 400 A change of 1 causes a shift of 0 1 mm adjustment F05 401 03 F05 401 04 Vertical size plate Standard white plate Highe...

Page 780: ... 1 mm adjustment Not change Caution ADJ Y DF Use it to adjust the ADF read start position ADF horizontal registration in scanning direction Range of 100 to 400 unit 0 1 mm adjustment STRD POS Use it to adjust the CCD read position for stream reading Range of 30 to 60 A change of 1 causes a shift of 0 1 mm adjustment COPIER ADJUST F05 401 06 Feed direction Higher setting Lower setting Print image ...

Page 781: ...o standard white paper and standard white plate for shading correction EGGN ST Use it to enter an adjustment value for the edge gain correction start posi tion for the CCD EGGN END Use it to enter an adjustment value for the edge gain correction end position for the CCD LASER Adjusting the Laser Output If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB be sure to enter the settings indi cated on...

Page 782: ...de is valid only when the potential control mechanism is dis abled HVT DE Use it to enter the offset value for the development high voltage output for the high voltage unit Caution If you have replaced the high voltage unit or cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB enter the settings indicated on the new high voltage unit D HV DE Use it to enter the offset value for the development high voltage ...

Page 783: ...high density areas are faint correct the F value table Range of 1 to 9 default 5 adjustment BLANK Adjusting the Non Image Width If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB enter the value indicated on the service label BLANK T Use it to enter the image leading edge non image width adjustment value Range of 1 to 500 adjustment BLANK B Use it to enter the image trailing edge non image width...

Page 784: ... settings indicated on the service label EPOTOFST Use it to enter the offset value for the potential sensor Range of 0 to 255 default 0 adjustment VD OFST Use it to enter the offset value for the VD target potential for the copier Range of 5 to 5 unit 10 V default 0 adjustment DE OFS P Use it to enter the offset value for the VL target potential for the printer PDL Vdc fine adjustment Range of 50 ...

Page 785: ...e of a double sided sheet Caution If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB enter the settings indicated on the service label TR N2 Use it to enter the output adjustment value for the transfer charging current printing on the 2nd side of a double sided plain paper sheet Caution If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB enter the settings indicated on the service label PRE TR ...

Page 786: ...ntroller PCB or cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the new DC controller PCB HV SP Adjusting the Output of the Separation Charging Assembly SP N1 Use it to enter the output adjustment value of the separation charging cur rent printing on the face of a sheet of plain paper and printing on the 1st side of a double sided sheet Caution If you...

Page 787: ...edge margin Range of 50 to 50 unit 0 1 mm adjustment Caution If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB enter the settings indicated on the service label ADJ REFE Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for re pickup If the image is displaced on the front increase the setting Range of 101 to 100 unit 0 1 mm adjustment Caution If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB ente...

Page 788: ... replaced the paper width detecting VR execute FUNCTION CST in service mode C4 A4R Use it to enter the paper width basic value A4R 100 V model only for the cassette 4 Caution If you have replaced the paper width detecting VR execute FUNCTION CST in service mode MF A4R Use it to enter the paper width basic value A4R for the manual feed tray Caution If you have replaced the paper width detecting VR ...

Page 789: ... MISC Making Other Adjustments If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB enter the settings indicated on the service label ATM Use it to select an operating environment in relation to atmospheric pres sure A low atmospheric pressure tends to cause leakage lower the target poten tial control Range of 0 to 2 0 1 to 0 75 atm up to altitude of 2500m adjustment 1 0 75 to 0 70 atm up to altit...

Page 790: ...0 unit 0 5 mm adjustment Using the Mode 1 Make a print of the test chart and check the position of the image 2 Select the mode item and change the setting to make adjustments 3 Press the OK key 4 Make a print of the test chart once again and check to see the position of the image is as indicated LA SPEED Use it to adjust the original feed speed for ADF stream reading speed A higher setting increas...

Page 791: ...er setting moves the punch holes toward the leading edge middle of the sheet Range of 4 to 2 unit mm adjustment Using the Mode 1 Make a print of the Test Chart and check the position of the holes 2 Select this item and change the setting as needed 3 Press the OK key 4 Make a print of the Test Chart once again and see that the position for the holes is as indicated SORTER ADJUST Feeding direction H...

Page 792: ...PTER 5 SERVICE MODE 5 59 T 5 FUNCTION operation inspection mode 5 1 COPIER The following screen appears in response to COPIER FUNCTION for the items see the pages that follow F05 501 01 INSTALL CCD LASER DPC CST CLEANING FIXING SYSTEM PANEL CLEAR PART CHK MISC R MISC P HRD DISK SENS ADJ ...

Page 793: ...stops automatically at the end of the operation STRD POS Use it to execute auto adjustment of the position of the CCD read position for stream reading mode Caution Execute this mode at time of installing an ADF or if you have removed and then installed the existing ADF Using the Mode 1 Select this item and press the OK key Auto adjustment is executed 2 See that the adjustment ends automatically 3 ...

Page 794: ...canning lamp inverter PCB or copyboard glass standard white plate Use the whitest of all papers used by the user as the standard white paper Using the Mode 1 Place sheets of standard white paper 10 sheets min on the copyboard glass 2 Select the mode item and press the OK key The machine executes auto adjustment about 1 min The machine stops operation at the end of auto adjustment 3 Record the upda...

Page 795: ...orrection Range of 216 to 296 a multiple of 8 causes a shift of about 0 189 mm adjustment Caution If dirt is found on the copyboard glass execute this mode to avoid the area when reading the standard white plate You must execute the following if you have changed the setting COPIER FUNCTION CCD SH PS ST F05 501 03 Vertical size plate Standard white plate Lower setting Higher setting Copyboard glass...

Page 796: ...g the Mode 1 Clean the back of the copyboard glass 2 Open the ADF copyboard cover 3 Select SH PS ST to highlight and press the OK key 4 The machine executes automatic adjustment about 10 sec 5 When done the machine stops automatically indicating the result OK NG If NG is indicated perform the following and execute the mode once again a Is the ADF copyboard cover open b Is the copyboard glass mount...

Page 797: ...ecute this mode Using the Mode 1 Open the ADF copyboard cover be sure to do so 2 Select the item and press the OK key 3 Wait until auto adjustment ends about 1 sec 4 See that auto adjustment ends automatically and the results OK NG are displayed If NG is indicated check the following and execute adjustment once a Is the ADF copyboard cover open b Is the reading glass mounted correctly c Is the edg...

Page 798: ...C or higher If you have replaced the photosensitive drum or the laser unit or changed the drum potential setting execute potential control using this mode item Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and enter 1 then press the OK key 2 Turn off and then on the power switch The machine will execute potential control OFST Use it to execute offset adjustment for the potential sensor Caution Do not exec...

Page 799: ...the side guide plate to suit the STMTR width 2 Select C3 STMTR C4 STMTR and press the OK key The machine executes adjustment automatically at the end of which the value is stored 3 Likewise repeat steps 1 and 2 for A4R MF A4R MF A6R MF A4 Use it to store the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray Caution For fine adjustment after storing the basic value make the following selec tions ADJ...

Page 800: ...ive times consecutively The machine stops automatically at the end of the cleaning operation FIXING Executing Auto Adjustment for Fixing Assembly Related Items NIP CHK Use it to obtain an output for measuring the fixing nip width Using the Mode 1 Make about 20 A4 copies of the test sheet 2 Place an A4 sheet of paper on the manual feed tray 3 Select the mode item to highlight and press the OK key T...

Page 801: ...sequence 2 Select LED OFF to end the operation LED OFF Use it to end a LED check of the control panel Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item to end the check KEY CHK Use it to check key inputs Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item 2 Press any key so that its corresponding character will appear on the touch panel indicating that the input is normal T05 501 01 TOUCHCHK Use it to adjust the coordinate...

Page 802: ...ND BY stop STOP clear CLEAR ID ID interrupt INTERRUPT additional functions USER guide T05 501 01 PART CHK Checking the operation of various loads CL Use it to select the clutch to check Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item 2 Using the keypad enter the code of the clutch in question T05 501 02 3 Press the OK key CL ON Use it to check the operation of a clutch Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item ...

Page 803: ...registration motor remains on for 10 sec and then turns off The shift tray motor stops at the front rear home position SL Use it to select the solenoid to check for operation Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item 2 Using the keypad enter the code of the solenoid T05 501 04 3 Press the OK key SL ON Use it to check the operation of the solenoid Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and press the OK ...

Page 804: ...4 8 right deck lifter motor M5 20 duplexing feed left motor M29 9 left deck lifter motor M4 21 delivery motor M13 10 cassette 3 lifter motor M20 22 pre registration motor M17 11 cassette 4 lifter motor M21 23 duplexing feed right motor M18 12 right deck pickup motor M11 24 shift tray motor SM 101 T05 501 03 Code Solenoid Name Code Name Code Name 1 right deck pickup solenoid SL6 7 delivery flapper ...

Page 805: ...de item and press the OK key 2 Turn off and then on the main power switch R CON Use it to clear the RAM on the reader controller PCB Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and press the OK key 2 Turn off and then on the main power switch SERVICE Use it to clear the backup data of service mode COPIER OPTION Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and press the OK key 2 Turn off and then on the main po...

Page 806: ...switch CNT DCON Use it to clear the counter for servicing found on the DC controller PCB Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and press the OK key 2 Turn off and then on the main power switch MMI Use it to clear the backup data on user mode settings spec ID group ID mode memory etc Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and press the OK key 2 Turn off and then on the main power switch CARD Clearin...

Page 807: ...rvice mode items KEY HIST Use it to print out the history of key inputs made on the control panel Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and press the OK key The machine will print out the history of key inputs HIST PRT Use it to print out the history of jams and errors in service mode Using the Mode 1 Select the item mode and press the OK key The machine will print out the history of jams and erro...

Page 808: ...tack of sheets about 60 mm high at the point of detection of either sensor on the shift tray 3 Select the mode item and press the OK key 4 By referring to the indication move the sensor closer to the paper and fix it in position where the indication changes to ON 5 Move the paper to the position of detection of the other sensor 6 Repeat step 4 for the other sensor 7 Press the Stop key to end the a...

Page 809: ... selected using CHECK TYPE recovery Check TYPE when 0 check sectors on entire HDD and recover when 1 image storage area when 2 general file storage area when 3 PDL file storage area when 4 program file storage area To use Press the OK key to execute HD CLEAR Use it to initialize the hard disk Check TYPE when 0 4 disabled when 1 image storage area when 2 general file storage area when 3 PDF related...

Page 810: ... SERVICE MODE 5 77 T 5 2 FEEDER SENS INT Use it to adjust the sensitivity of each sensor of the ADF Caution Be sure to clean the sensor before executing this mode Using the Mode 1 Select the mode item and press the OK key The machine stops operation at the end of the adjustment COPIER FUNCTION ...

Page 811: ...0 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 5 78 T 6 OPTION settings mode 6 1 COPIER The following screen appears in response to COPIER OPTION for the items see the pages that follow BODY USER CST ACC TEMPO INT FACE F05 601 01 ...

Page 812: ...MP Use it to select down sequence mode Settings 0 OFF 1 priority on fixing while controlling down sequence tempera ture to 10 C for all 2 priority on productivity while controlling down sequence temperature to 5 C for all IDL MODE Use it to select idle rotation mode for the developing assembly Settings 0 OFF no idle rotation default 1 auto control by environment sensor 2 idle rotation started when...

Page 813: ... for 2 sec OFF for 1 sec high humidity ON for 4 sec OFF for 2 sec 1 uses fixed pattern ON for 2 sec OFF for 1 sec SCANSLCT Use it to turn on off the ADF original size detection mechanism When ON the scan size is determined according to the detected original size Settings 0 OFF default 1 ON OHP TEMP Use it to switch the temperature setting for transparency mode The control mechanism will use a lowe...

Page 814: ...normal default 1 print raw data WARM UP Use it to reduce the warm up time if the room temperature is likely to be about 18 C or higher when the machine is first turned on In the case of the iR5000 Series the multiple rotation initial standby and print start temperatures are reduced by 15 C In the case of the iR6000 Series 100 V model the period of initial mul tiple rotation is reduced by 1 min Cau...

Page 815: ...hange 4 for copy image VDT 50 V for printer image no change 5 for copy image no change for printer image VDT 25V Vdc 25V 6 for copy image no change for printer image VDT 50V Vdc 25V RMT LANG Use it to switch the language for remote UI driven over the WEB Settings Use it to select a language code ja en etc to identify the site ex pressed as in service mode COPIER DISPLAY USER LANGUAGE Using the Mod...

Page 816: ...ransfer 2 to prevent separation fault 3 to prevent transfer fault TR SP MF Use it to prevent the transfer separation output level when the manual feed tray is used to prevent various problems Settings 0 normal default 1 to prevent re transfer 2 to prevent separation fault 3 to prevent transfer fault TR SP DK Use it to switch the transfer separation output level when the paper deck is used as the s...

Page 817: ...e machine SMTPRXPN Use it to change the number of the SMTP reception port Settings 0 to 99999 in increments of 1 Default 25 After a change be sure to re boot the machine POP3PN Use it to change the number of the P0P3 reception port Settings 0 to 9999 in increments of 1 Default 110 After a change be sure to re boot the machine USER Making User Related Settings COPY LIM Use it to change the upper li...

Page 818: ...ange the type of soft counter 2 of the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer Settings 000 to 804 T05 601 01 default 000 for 100 V model 103 for 120 230 V model COUNTER3 Use it to change the type of soft counter 3 of the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer Settings 000 to 804 T05 601 01 default 000 for 100 V model 203 for 120 230 V model COUNTER4 Use it to ...

Page 819: ...led in absence of card default 1 printing enabled in presence of card B4 L CNT Use it to specify whether B4 sheets are counted as large size or small size for soft counters 1 through 6 Settings 0 small size default 1 large size TRAY STP Use it to prohibit suspension of printing by imposing limits to the number of sheets to staple or mixing of sizes of the finisher Settings 0 normal mode suspend pr...

Page 820: ...Use it to prevent auto copy start when a coin robot and a card reader Settings 0 copy job auto start selected default 1 copy job auto start not selected OP SZ DT Use it to turn on and off the original size detection mechanism in book mode Settings 0 OFF accepts input of original size from control panel default 1 ON detects original size automatically NW SCAN Use it to enable disable the network sc...

Page 821: ...an 200s copies 600s box 300s prints 700 reception prints 400s copies prints 800 report prints Legend counter effective for the machine 4C full color mono mono color Y M C R G B sepia mono Bk black mono L large size larger than B4 S small size B4 or smaller number in counter count indicating large size sheets In service mode the settings may be changed so that B4 or larger may be counted as large s...

Page 822: ... print Mono 2 313 print Bk 1 314 print Bk 2 315 print 4C L 316 print 4C S 317 print Mono L 318 print Mono S Effective No Counter type 319 print Bk L 320 print Bk S 321 print 4C Mono L 322 print 4C Mono S 323 print 4C Mono 2 324 print 4C Mono 1 325 print 4C L double sided 326 print 4C S double sided 327 print Mono L double sided 328 print Mono S double sided 329 print Bk L double sided 330 print Bk...

Page 823: ...l 1 copy scan 4C 510 color scan total 2 511 color scan L copy scan 4C L 512 color scan S copy scan 4C S 513 copy scan L 514 copy scan S 515 copy scan total Effective No Counter type 601 box print total 1 602 box print total 2 603 box print L 604 box print S 701 reception print total 1 702 reception print total 2 703 reception print L 704 reception print S 801 report print total 1 802 report print ...

Page 824: ...ault 26 OFFICIO 27 E OFFI 36 A OFI 37 M OFI CST U3 Use it to specify paper names used for paper size group U3 Settings 34 G LGL default 29 A LTR 25 A FLS CST U4 Use it to specify paper names used for paper size group U4 Settings 18 LTR default 29 A LTR P SZ C1 P SZ C2 Use it to specify paper size used in the front deck C1 right deck C2 left deck Caution After electing the appropriate paper size be...

Page 825: ... 18 LTR LETTER 19 STMT STATEMENT 20 STMTR STATEMENTR Code Paper Names Code Notation Name 21 LGL LEGAL 22 K LGL Korean government 23 K LGLR Korean government R 24 FLSC FOOLSCAP 25 A FLS Australian FOOLSCAP 26 OFI OFFICIO 27 E OFI Ecuadorian OFFICIO 28 B OFI Bolivian OFFICIO 29 A LTR Argentine LETTER 30 A LTRR Argentine LETTERR 31 G LTR Government LETTER 32 G LTRR Government LETTERR 33 A LGL Argenti...

Page 826: ...ntroller Settings 0 external EFI controller absent default 1 external EFI controller prevent TEMPO Use it as an emergency remedy when the potential sensor or the environment sensor is faulty out of order F POT SW Use it to turn on and off the setting if a transfer fault occurs because of a fault error in the potential sensor Use it as an emergency remedy until the potential sensor is replaced Sett...

Page 827: ...vironment senor has a fault er ror Use it as an emergency remedy until the environment sensor is replaced Settings 0 OFF default 1 enables F HUM D F HUM D Use it to enter an approximate humidity level of the site of installation Uses the input humidity as the output of the humidity sensor Valid only if F HUM SW is set to 1 Settings 30 to 99 default 35 COPIER OPTION ...

Page 828: ...ZE SW Use it to turn on off the mixed size detection mechanism for AB and Inch series originals Settings 0 disable default 1 enable 6 3 SORTER BLNK SW Use it to set the margin width W on both sides of the fold when the saddle stitcher is used Settings 0 normal width 5 mm 1 larger width 10 mm default W F05 603 01 FEEDER OPTION ...

Page 829: ... indication default 1 enable indication MENU 4 Use it to enable level 4 indication for the printer settings menu Settings 0 disable indication default 1 enable indication PCI1 OFF Use it to turn off the slot 1 function when the board inserted into the PCI slot 1 is out of order Settings 0 normal default 1 OFF board function not used PCI2 OFF Use it to turn off the slot 2 function when the board in...

Page 830: ...000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 5 97 T 7 TEST test print mode The following screen appears in response to COPIER TEST for the items see the pages that follow PG NETWORK F05 701 01 ...

Page 831: ... 01 TXPH Use it to switch between text mode and photo mode during test printing Settings 0 text mode 1 photo mode PG_PICK Use it to select the source of paper for test printing Settings 1 right deck default 2 left deck 3 cassette 3 4 cassette 4 5 to 6 not used 7 paper deck 8 manual feed tray TYPE Input No Test Print Type Input No Type 00 image form CCD normal print 01 grid 02 17 gradations w image...

Page 832: ...em administrator that the machine has properly been installed asking him her to make the appropriate network settings 4 Inform the system administrator that the network connection will be tested and find out the remote host address i e IP address of the PC terminal on the user network for PING 5 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER TEST NETWORK PING then enter the IP address obtain...

Page 833: ... of the network inter face board NIC or the NIC itself may have a problem Go to step 7 to make a check The address will be returned before it reaches the NIC allowing a check on the machine s TCP IP settings 7 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER TEST NETWORK PING then enter the local host address i e the machine s IP address and press the OK key If NG is indicated the NIC connecti...

Page 834: ... for the items see the pages that follow TOTAL PICK UP FEEDE PRDC 1 DRBL 1 DRBL 2 PICK UP FEEDER JAM TOTAL MISC F05 801 01 Clearing the Counter Reading 1 Select the item to clear to highlight 2 Press the Clear key on the control panel The counter will be cleared and will return to 00000000 Small Size and Large Size in the Mode large size L larger than A4 or LTR small size S A4 or LTR or smaller ...

Page 835: ... the limit setting guide to replacement the setting may be changed by select ing the image and using the keypad thereafter press the OK key 4 Indicates the ratio of counter readings to limit levels 5 A single exclamation mark will be indicated between 90 and 100 two marks at 100 or higher otherwise no mark 6 Indicates an estimated number of days to replacement in the case of the example 82 days Li...

Page 836: ... jam counter C3 cassette 3 jam counter C4 cassette 4 jam counter DK paper deck jam counter Level 2 MISC Level 3 FIX WEB fixing web counter Be sure to reset after replacing the fixing web WST TNR waste toner counter Be sure to reset after disposing of the waste toner When FIX WEB counts up to 2000 E005 will be indicated Level 2 PRDC 1 Level 3 PRM WIRE primary charging wire counter PRM GRID primary ...

Page 837: ...ller counter C4 SP RL cassette 4 separation roller counter C4 FD RL cassette 4 feed roller counter LD PU RL left front deck pickup roller counter LD SP RL left front deck separation roller counter LD FD RL left front deck feed roller counter RD SP RL right front deck separation roller counter RD FD RL right front deck feed roller counter RD PU RL right front deck pickup roller counter M SP RL manu...

Page 838: ...separation pad counter DF FD RL ADF feed roller counter LNT TAPE ADF dust collecting tape counter PD PU RL paper deck pickup roller counter PD SP RL paper deck separation roller counter PD FD RL paper deck feed roller counter FIN STPR finisher stapler counter FIN FDBL finisher feed belt counter FIN PDDL finisher paddol counter SDL STPL saddle staple counter PUNCH punch counter PNCH HRS punch harne...

Page 840: ...or an open circuit The thermal switch TP1 has an open circuit The fixing heater has an open circuit The AC driver is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0000 After the main power switch is turned on the temperature detected by the main thermistor does not reach 70 C Caution The error must be reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR E001 Main Cause The main thermistor TH...

Page 841: ... The DC controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0000 The temperature detected by the main thermistor is 70 C for 2 sec or more after it has reached 100 C Caution The error must be reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR E004 Main Cause The AC driver has a short circuit The DC controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0000 The AC driver is found to have a short circuit hard circuit dete...

Page 842: ...waste toner feedscrew is faulty The water toner clock sensor MSW2 is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0000 The rotation of the waste toner feedscrew goes out of order and the switch MSW2 is pressed multiple times during a specific pe riod of time E014 Main Cause The fixing motor M19 is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0000 The motor clock signal is d...

Page 843: ... As the result of potential control the drum surface potential VL2 of the white background is about 200 V generating solid black im ages 0002 The primary charging output used for print output and the drum surface potential after laser output has been made are about 200 V generating solid black images E100 Main Cause The BD PCB is faulty The laser unit is faulty The laser driver PCB is faulty The w...

Page 844: ...50 times or more t intervals of 100 msec E121 Main Cause The controller cooling fan FM4 is faulty The wiring is faulty short cir cuit open circuit The DC controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 Although the controller cooling fan FM4 is being driven the clock signal FM4CLK does not arrive for 5 secs or more E196 Main Cause The EEPROM on the DC controller PCB is faulty The location of the E...

Page 845: ...the image leading edge signal does not arrive from the ADF E220 Main Cause The lamp inverter PCB is faulty The reader controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 The lamp inverter PCB is found to have a fault E225 Main Cause The scanning lamp xenon tube is faulty The inverter PCB is faulty The CCD AP PCB is faulty The reader controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0000 A specific signal lev...

Page 846: ...and the data read do not match 0003 When data is written the ID in the EEPROM and the ID in the ROM are found not to match E302 Main Cause The CCD AP PCB is faulty The wiring is faulty short circuit open cir cuit The reader controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 During shading the reader controller PCB does not end shading in 1 sec 0002 In stream reading the edge white accumulation proces...

Page 847: ...isk drive is faulty The main controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 A mount error was detected when the hard disk was started up from the boot ROM 0002 A data read error from the hard disk was detected when the hard disk was started from the boot ROM 0003 a sector error is found on the hard disk 0004 an error is found in the read write address for the hard disk E607 Main Cause The hard di...

Page 848: ... ADF controller PCB is faulty The finisher controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 Data has been written to the error register of the IPC IC5021 on the reader controller PCB four times or more within 1 5 secs 0002 Data has been written to the error register of the IPC IC120 on the DC controller PCB four times or more within 2 secs 0003 Data has been written to the error register of the IPC...

Page 849: ...y data controller or the NE controller is out of order or an open circuit has been detected Caution The error must be reset in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR E719 Main Cause The wiring is faulty short circuit open circuit The coin vendor is faulty The main controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 The communication between the coin vendor and the main control ler PCB has been interru...

Page 850: ... controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0000 An error has occurred in the PCI bus E743 Main cause The connector has poor contact The main controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0000 The reader controller PCB has detected an error in the communica tion between the main controller PCB and the reader controller PCB E744 Main Cause The boot ROM and the firmware have a mismatch of model or type...

Page 851: ...en circuit The feed fan FM1 is faulty The heat discharge fan FM3 is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 While the heat discharge fan is being driven the clock signal FM3CLK does not arrive for 5 secs or more 0002 While the feed fan is being driven the clock signal FM1CLK does not arrive for 5 secs or more E824 Main Cause The wiring is faulty short circuit open circuit The...

Page 852: ...ignal FMLCK arrives for 100 msec or more E420 Main Cause The EEPROM is faulty The ADF controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 When the host machine s power switch is turned on the backup data of the EEPROM cannot be read or the data if read has an er ror E421 Main Cause The EEPROM is faulty The ADF controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 Backup data cannot be written to the EEPROM ...

Page 853: ... finisher controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 Communication between the height sensor and the finisher control ler PCB is not possible or communication data has an error 0002 Communication between the height sensor and the finisher control ler PCB is not possible for a specific period of time 0003 At time of power on the connector of the height sensor is found to be disconnected 0004 W...

Page 854: ... motor has been driven for 2 secs 0002 The alignment plate does not return to home position when the alignment motor has been driven for 2 secs E531 Main Cause The stapler home position detecting switch MS7 is faulty The stapler mo tor M6 is faulty The finisher controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 The stapler does not leave home position when the stapler motor has been driven for 0 5 se...

Page 855: ...r 1 2 PI9 PI19 is faulty The tray upper limit detecting switch MS5 is faulty The tray lifter motor M5 is faulty The finisher controller PCB is faulty 0001 The ascent does not end in 15 secs when the tray lift motor is driven or the tray home position cannot be detected when the tray lift motor has been driven for 15 secs 0002 While the tray is moving up the tray upper limit detection switch is fou...

Page 856: ...n driven for 200 msecs 0002 The puncher does not return to home position when the punch mo tor has been driven for 200 msecs E593 Main Cause The horizontal registration home position sensor PI1P is faulty The hori zontal registration motor M1P is faulty The punch driver PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 The puncher does not leave home position when the horizontal reg istration motor has been dr...

Page 857: ...een driven for 1 sec E5F1 Main Cause The folding motor clock sensor PI4S is faulty The paper folding home position sensor PI21S is faulty The folding motor M2S is faulty The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 The number of detection pulses of the folding motor clock sensor drops below a specific value 0002 The state of the paper folding home position sensor does not ch...

Page 858: ...r MS5S is faulty The stitch motor rear M6S is faulty The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty Mode of Detection 0001 The stitcher home position sensor rear does not turn off when the stitch motor rear has been rotated CW for 0 5 sec or more 0002 The stitch home position sensor rear does not turn on when the stitch motor rear has been rotated CCW for 0 5 sec or more E5F5 Main Cause The stitch h...

Page 859: ...sh on plate leading edge position sensor does not turn off when the paper push on plate motor has been driven for 0 3 sec or more 0004 The number of detection pulses of the paper push on plate motor clock sensor drops below a specific value 0005 The paper push on plate leading edge sensor does not turn on when the paper push on plate motor has been driven for 0 3 sec or more E5F8 Main Cause The gu...

Page 860: ...cover switch detects an open condition for 1 sec or more from the start of the initial rotation of the host machine or the start of printing 0002 When the inlet cover front cover and delivery cover are found to be closed the front cover switch detects an open condition for 1 sec or more after the start of the initial rotation of the host machine or the start of printing 0003 When the inlet cover f...

Page 862: ...x feed left motor M29 Duplex feed right motor M18 Duplex paper sensor PS34 Duplex pre registration sensor PS30 Horizontal registration sensor PS31 Reversal flapper solenoid SL 11 Printer unit PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY Print command received Print command received yyy yyy CCW rotation CW rotation yyy yyy Reader unit ADF STBY Original set sensor PI5 Post separation sensor S3 Registration 1 paper ...

Page 863: ... inlet guide solenoid SL1 Internal delivery sensor PS35 Eternal delivery sensor PS36 Fixing motor M19 Delivery flapper solenoid SL5 Reversal motor M14 Reversal sensor 2 PS38 Reversal sensor 1 PS37 Fixing web solenoid SL2 Duplex feed left motor M29 Duplex feed right motor M18 Duplex paper sensor PS34 Duplex pre registration sensor PS30 Horizontal registration sensor PS31 Reversal flapper solenoid S...

Page 864: ...SETTE3 LENGTH DETECTION signal C3PLV CASSETTE3 PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal C3PUSD CASSETTE3 PICK UP SOLENOID DRIVE command C3PWD CASSETTE3 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION C3RTD CASSETTE3 RETRY DETECTION signal C4LMD CASSETTE4 LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE command C4LTP CASSETTE4 LIFTER POSITION DETECTION signal C4OP CASSETTE4 OPEN CLOSED DETECTION signal C4PD CASSETTE4 PAPER DETECTION signal C4PL0 CASSETTE4 LENGTH DE...

Page 865: ...RGING COOLING FAN CLOCK signal FM2ON PRIMARY CHARGING COOLING FAN DRIVE command FM3CLK DERIVERY FAN CLOCK signal FM3ON DELIVERY FAN DRIVE command FM4CLK CONTROLLER COOLING FAN CLOCK signal FM4ON CONTROLLER COOLING FAN DRIVE command FM5CLK DE CURLING FAN CLOCK signal FM5ON DE CURLING FAN DRIVE command FM6CLK DC POWER SUPPLY FAN CLOCK signal FM6ON DC POWER SUPPLY FAN DRIVE command FM7CLK HARD DISK F...

Page 866: ...ECT signal LODOP RIGHT LOWER COVER OPEN CLOSED DETECTION signal LSH SAMPLE LASER ACTIVATION signal LWRPD LASER WRITE START DETECTION signal M10ON HOPPER MOTOR TONER SUPPLY DRIVE command M11_A RIGHT DECK PICK UP MOTOR A DRIVE command M11_A RIGHT DECK PICK UP MOTOR A DRIVE command M11_B RIGHT DECK PICK UP MOTOR B DRIVE command M11_B RIGHT DECK PICK UP MOTOR B DRIVE command M12_A CASSETTE3 4 PICK UP ...

Page 867: ...d M24_B LEFT DECK PICK UP MOTOR B DRIVE command M24_B LEFT DECK PICK UP MOTOR B DRIVE command M25_A VERTICAL PATH DUPLEXING FEEDING MOTOR A DRIVE command M25_A VERTICAL PATH DUPLEXING FEEDING MOTOR A DRIVE command M25_B VERTICAL PATH DUPLEXING FEEDING MOTOR B DRIVE command M25_B VERTICAL PATH DUPLEXING FEEDING MOTOR B DRIVE command M26_A VERTICAL PATH UPPER MOTOR A DRIVE command M26_A VERTICAL PAT...

Page 868: ... REMOTE signal PR CNT PRIMARY CORONA CURRENT CONTROL signal PR LEAK DETECT PRIMARY CHARGING LEAKAGE DETECTION signal PT SP CNT PRE TRANSFER CHARGING CONTROL signal PT SP LEAK DETECT PRE TRANSFER SEPARATIONCHARGINGLEAKAGEDETECTIONsignal PT SP REMOTE PRE TRANSFER SEPARATIONCHARGINGREMOTEsignal PTRCLM1 PRE TRNANSFER CHARGINGWIRE CLEANING MOTOR1 DRIVE command PTRCLM2 PRE TRNANSFER CHARGINGWIRE CLEANIN...

Page 869: ...IXING MAIN THERMISTOR signal TH2 FIXING SUB THERMISTOR signal THHUM1 MACHINE INSIDE HUMIDITY signal TR CNT TRANSFER CHARGING CURRENT CONTROL signal TR LEAK DETECT TRANSFER CHARGING LEAKAGE DETECTION signal TSCLM1 TRANSFER SEPARATION CHARGING WIRE CLEANING MOTOR1 DRIVE command TSCLM2 TRANSFER SEPARATION CHARGING WIRE CLEANING MOTOR2 DRIVE command VP1PD VERTICAL PATH 1 PAPER DETECTION signal VP2PD V...

Page 870: ... C3PLV 5V 0V C4PLV 5V 0V LWRPD 5V 13 14 15 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 5 3 2 1 J114 J123 J124 J201M J201F J101 J102 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 J202F 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 J202M J1543M J1543F J1541M J1541F J1542M J1542F FM7 HDD fan Environment sensor Laser write start sensor 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 J202 J1541 J1542 Shift tray PCB 5V GND 24V GND FULLON SCW S...

Page 871: ... TXOUTEN RXDATA RXROADN TXDATA TXENDN M CLK CLOCK NC LED100 SW100 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 9 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 9 10 4 5 6 7 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 2 1 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 2 1 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 2 1 4 5 6 7 8 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 3 2 1 J2H PCB2 J2D J2L J4D...

Page 872: ...1 J114 STHPL GND 5V STHPR GND 5V 6 5 4 3 2 1 J103 J203 J204 1 2 3 1 2 3 PS101 PS102 SPCFULL GND 5V SPEXIST GND NC NC 5V 6 7 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 J104 J206 J205F J205H J205 J207 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 S P PS104 PS103 J105 1 2 M SDCM1 SDCM2 Shift motor PCB1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 GND 5V SPSFULL J208 J106 S P PS105 Limit sensor front Limit sensor rear HP sensor front Tray paper sensor Shift Tray Driver PCB 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 873: ...dard tools set No 1 2 3 4 5 Name Digital multimeter Door switch Mirror positioning tool front rear NA 3 Test Sheet Potential sensor electrode Toll No FY9 2002 TKN 0093 FY9 3009 FY9 9196 FY9 3012 Shape Rank A A B A B Remarks Used when making electrical checks Used when positioning the No 1 No 2 mirror Used when adjusting checking images Used to make zero level checks on potential sensors ...

Page 874: ...h group of five persons is expected to carry one C each workshop is expected to carry one No 6 7 8 Name Environment sensor checking sensor Tester extension pin Tester extension pin L shaped Toll No FY9 3014 FY9 3038 FY9 3039 Shape Rank B A A Remarks Used to check the environment sensor Used when making electrical checks Used when making electrical checks ...

Page 875: ...ing photosensitive drum Lubrication scanner rail Lubrication drum heater contact Composition Fluorescent family hydrocarbon alcohol surface activating agent water Fluorescent family hydrocarbon chlorine family hydrocarbon alcohol Mineral family lithium soap molybdenum disulfide Mineral oil paraffin family Silicone oil Cerium oxide Silicone oil Ether polytetra fluoethylene Remarks Do not bring near...

Page 876: ...cts Quality Assurance Center CANON INC Printed in Japan REVISION 0 JUNE 2001 18723 5 1 Hakusan 7 chome Toride shi Ibaraki 302 8501 Japan COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC CANON iR5000i iR6000i REV 0 JUNE 2001 PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON ...

Page 877: ...PRINTED IN JAPAN IMPRIME AU JAPON xxxxMx xx 1 This publication is printed on 100 reprocessed paper ...

Page 878: ......

Search results

Summary of Contents for iR5000i

Reviews:

Related manuals for iR5000i

Brands by name

Popular brands

Canon iR5000i, Service Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for iR5000i

Reviews:

Related manuals for iR5000i

Brands by name

Popular brands